]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git/blob - gdb/doc/gdb.texinfo
* gdb.texinfo (Symbols): Add class NAME to doc for ptype.
[thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git] / gdb / doc / gdb.texinfo
1 \input texinfo @c -*-texinfo-*-
2 @c Copyright (c) 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3 @c
4 @c %**start of header
5 @c makeinfo ignores cmds prev to setfilename, so its arg cannot make use
6 @c of @set vars. However, you can override filename with makeinfo -o.
7 @setfilename gdb.info
8 @c
9 @include gdb-cfg.texi
10 @c
11 @ifset GENERIC
12 @settitle Debugging with @value{GDBN}
13 @end ifset
14 @ifclear GENERIC
15 @settitle Debugging with @value{GDBN} (@value{TARGET})
16 @end ifclear
17 @setchapternewpage odd
18 @c %**end of header
19
20 @iftex
21 @c @smallbook
22 @c @cropmarks
23 @end iftex
24
25 @finalout
26 @syncodeindex ky cp
27
28 @c readline appendices use @vindex
29 @syncodeindex vr cp
30
31 @c ===> NOTE! <==
32 @c Determine the edition number in *three* places by hand:
33 @c 1. First ifinfo section 2. title page 3. top node
34 @c To find the locations, search for !!set
35
36 @c GDB CHANGELOG CONSULTED BETWEEN:
37 @c Fri Oct 11 23:27:06 1991 John Gilmore (gnu at cygnus.com)
38 @c Sat Dec 22 02:51:40 1990 John Gilmore (gnu at cygint)
39
40 @c THIS MANUAL REQUIRES TEXINFO-2 macros and info-makers to format properly.
41
42 @ifinfo
43 @c This is a dir.info fragment to support semi-automated addition of
44 @c manuals to an info tree. zoo@cygnus.com is developing this facility.
45 @format
46 START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
47 * Gdb:: The GNU debugger.
48 END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
49 @end format
50 @end ifinfo
51 @c
52 @c
53 @ifinfo
54 This file documents the GNU debugger @value{GDBN}.
55
56 @c !!set edition, date, version
57 This is Edition 4.09, August 1993,
58 of @cite{Debugging with @value{GDBN}: the GNU Source-Level Debugger}
59 for GDB Version @value{GDBVN}.
60
61 Copyright (C) 1988, '89, '90, '91, '92, '93 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
62
63 Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
64 this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
65 are preserved on all copies.
66
67 @ignore
68 Permission is granted to process this file through TeX and print the
69 results, provided the printed document carries copying permission
70 notice identical to this one except for the removal of this paragraph
71 (this paragraph not being relevant to the printed manual).
72
73 @end ignore
74 Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
75 manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided also that the
76 entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
77 permission notice identical to this one.
78
79 Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
80 into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions.
81 @end ifinfo
82
83 @titlepage
84 @title Debugging with @value{GDBN}
85 @subtitle The GNU Source-Level Debugger
86 @ifclear GENERIC
87 @subtitle (@value{TARGET})
88 @end ifclear
89 @sp 1
90 @c !!set edition, date, version
91 @subtitle Edition 4.09, for @value{GDBN} version @value{GDBVN}
92 @subtitle August 1993
93 @author Richard M. Stallman and Roland H. Pesch
94 @page
95 @tex
96 {\parskip=0pt
97 \hfill (Send bugs and comments on @value{GDBN} to bug-gdb\@prep.ai.mit.edu.)\par
98 \hfill {\it Debugging with @value{GDBN}}\par
99 \hfill \TeX{}info \texinfoversion\par
100 \hfill pesch\@cygnus.com\par
101 }
102 @end tex
103
104 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
105 Copyright @copyright{} 1988, '89, '90, '91, '92, '93 Free Software
106 Foundation, Inc.
107 @sp 2
108 Published by the Free Software Foundation @*
109 675 Massachusetts Avenue, @*
110 Cambridge, MA 02139 USA @*
111 Printed copies are available for $20 each. @*
112 ISBN 1-882114-11-6 @*
113
114 Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
115 this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
116 are preserved on all copies.
117
118 Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
119 manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided also that the
120 entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
121 permission notice identical to this one.
122
123 Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
124 into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions.
125 @end titlepage
126 @page
127
128 @ifinfo
129 @node Top
130 @top Debugging with @value{GDBN}
131
132 This file describes @value{GDBN}, the GNU symbolic debugger.
133
134 @c !!set edition, date, version
135 This is Edition 4.09, April 1993, for GDB Version @value{GDBVN}.
136
137 @menu
138 * Summary:: Summary of @value{GDBN}
139 @ifset NOVEL
140 * New Features:: New features since GDB version 3.5
141 @end ifset
142 @ifclear BARETARGET
143 * Sample Session:: A sample @value{GDBN} session
144 @end ifclear
145
146 * Invocation:: Getting in and out of @value{GDBN}
147 * Commands:: @value{GDBN} commands
148 * Running:: Running programs under @value{GDBN}
149 * Stopping:: Stopping and continuing
150 * Stack:: Examining the stack
151 * Source:: Examining source files
152 * Data:: Examining data
153 @ifclear CONLY
154 * Languages:: Using @value{GDBN} with different languages
155 @end ifclear
156 @ifset CONLY
157 * C:: C language support
158 @end ifset
159 @c remnant makeinfo bug, blank line needed after two end-ifs?
160
161 * Symbols:: Examining the symbol table
162 * Altering:: Altering execution
163 * GDB Files:: @value{GDBN} files
164 * Targets:: Specifying a debugging target
165 * Controlling GDB:: Controlling @value{GDBN}
166 * Sequences:: Canned sequences of commands
167 @ifclear DOSHOST
168 * Emacs:: Using @value{GDBN} under GNU Emacs
169 @end ifclear
170
171 * GDB Bugs:: Reporting bugs in @value{GDBN}
172 * Command Line Editing:: Facilities of the readline library
173 * Using History Interactively::
174 @ifset NOVEL
175 * Renamed Commands::
176 @end ifset
177 @ifclear PRECONFIGURED
178 * Formatting Documentation:: How to format and print GDB documentation
179 * Installing GDB:: Installing GDB
180 @end ifclear
181
182 * Index:: Index
183 @end menu
184 @end ifinfo
185
186 @node Summary
187 @unnumbered Summary of @value{GDBN}
188
189 The purpose of a debugger such as @value{GDBN} is to allow you to see what is
190 going on ``inside'' another program while it executes---or what another
191 program was doing at the moment it crashed.
192
193 @value{GDBN} can do four main kinds of things (plus other things in support of
194 these) to help you catch bugs in the act:
195
196 @itemize @bullet
197 @item
198 Start your program, specifying anything that might affect its behavior.
199
200 @item
201 Make your program stop on specified conditions.
202
203 @item
204 Examine what has happened, when your program has stopped.
205
206 @item
207 Change things in your program, so you can experiment with correcting the
208 effects of one bug and go on to learn about another.
209 @end itemize
210
211 @ifclear CONLY
212 @ifclear MOD2
213 You can use @value{GDBN} to debug programs written in C or C++.
214 @end ifclear
215 @ifset MOD2
216 You can use @value{GDBN} to debug programs written in C, C++, and
217 Modula-2.
218 @end ifset
219 @ifset FORTRAN
220 @cindex Fortran
221 @value{GDBN} can be used to debug programs written in Fortran, although
222 it does not yet support entering expressions, printing values, etc.
223 using Fortran syntax. It may be necessary to refer to some variables
224 with a trailing underscore.
225 @end ifset
226 @end ifclear
227
228 @menu
229 * Free Software:: Freely redistributable software
230 * Contributors:: Contributors to GDB
231 @end menu
232
233 @node Free Software
234 @unnumberedsec Free software
235
236 @value{GDBN} is @dfn{free software}, protected by the GNU General Public License
237 (GPL). The GPL gives you the freedom to copy or adapt a licensed
238 program---but every person getting a copy also gets with it the
239 freedom to modify that copy (which means that they must get access to
240 the source code), and the freedom to distribute further copies.
241 Typical software companies use copyrights to limit your freedoms; the
242 Free Software Foundation uses the GPL to preserve these freedoms.
243
244 Fundamentally, the General Public License is a license which says that
245 you have these freedoms and that you cannot take these freedoms away
246 from anyone else.
247
248 @node Contributors
249 @unnumberedsec Contributors to GDB
250
251 Richard Stallman was the original author of GDB, and of many other GNU
252 programs. Many others have contributed to its development. This
253 section attempts to credit major contributors. One of the virtues of
254 free software is that everyone is free to contribute to it; with
255 regret, we cannot actually acknowledge everyone here. The file
256 @file{ChangeLog} in the GDB distribution approximates a blow-by-blow
257 account.
258
259 Changes much prior to version 2.0 are lost in the mists of time.
260
261 @quotation
262 @emph{Plea:} Additions to this section are particularly welcome. If you
263 or your friends (or enemies, to be evenhanded) have been unfairly
264 omitted from this list, we would like to add your names!
265 @end quotation
266
267 So that they may not regard their long labor as thankless, we
268 particularly thank those who shepherded GDB through major releases: Fred
269 Fish (release 4.9), Stu Grossman and John Gilmore (releases 4.8, 4.7,
270 4.6, 4.5, 4.4), John Gilmore (releases 4.3, 4.2, 4.1, 4.0, and 3.9); Jim
271 Kingdon (releases 3.5, 3.4, 3.3); and Randy Smith (releases 3.2, 3.1,
272 3.0). As major maintainer of GDB for some period, each contributed
273 significantly to the structure, stability, and capabilities of the
274 entire debugger.
275
276 Richard Stallman, assisted at various times by Peter TerMaat, Chris
277 Hanson, and Richard Mlynarik, handled releases through 2.8.
278
279 @ifclear CONLY
280 Michael Tiemann is the author of most of the GNU C++ support in GDB,
281 with significant additional contributions from Per Bothner. James
282 Clark wrote the GNU C++ demangler. Early work on C++ was by Peter
283 TerMaat (who also did much general update work leading to release 3.0).
284 @end ifclear
285
286 GDB 4 uses the BFD subroutine library to examine multiple
287 object-file formats; BFD was a joint project of David V.
288 Henkel-Wallace, Rich Pixley, Steve Chamberlain, and John Gilmore.
289
290 David Johnson wrote the original COFF support; Pace Willison did
291 the original support for encapsulated COFF.
292
293 Adam de Boor and Bradley Davis contributed the ISI Optimum V support.
294 Per Bothner, Noboyuki Hikichi, and Alessandro Forin contributed MIPS
295 support. Jean-Daniel Fekete contributed Sun 386i support. Chris
296 Hanson improved the HP9000 support. Noboyuki Hikichi and Tomoyuki
297 Hasei contributed Sony/News OS 3 support. David Johnson contributed
298 Encore Umax support. Jyrki Kuoppala contributed Altos 3068 support.
299 Keith Packard contributed NS32K support. Doug Rabson contributed
300 Acorn Risc Machine support. Chris Smith contributed Convex support
301 (and Fortran debugging). Jonathan Stone contributed Pyramid support.
302 Michael Tiemann contributed SPARC support. Tim Tucker contributed
303 support for the Gould NP1 and Gould Powernode. Pace Willison
304 contributed Intel 386 support. Jay Vosburgh contributed Symmetry
305 support.
306
307 Rich Schaefer and Peter Schauer helped with support of SunOS shared
308 libraries.
309
310 Jay Fenlason and Roland McGrath ensured that GDB and GAS agree about
311 several machine instruction sets.
312
313 Patrick Duval, Ted Goldstein, Vikram Koka and Glenn Engel helped
314 develop remote debugging. Intel Corporation and Wind River Systems
315 contributed remote debugging modules for their products.
316
317 Brian Fox is the author of the readline libraries providing
318 command-line editing and command history.
319
320 Andrew Beers of SUNY Buffalo wrote the language-switching code,
321 @ifset MOD2
322 the Modula-2 support,
323 @end ifset
324 and contributed the Languages chapter of this manual.
325
326 Fred Fish wrote most of the support for Unix System Vr4.
327 @ifclear CONLY
328 He also enhanced the command-completion support to cover C++ overloaded
329 symbols.
330 @end ifclear
331
332 Hitachi America, Ltd. sponsored the support for Hitachi microprocessors.
333
334 @ifset NOVEL
335 @node New Features
336 @unnumbered New Features since GDB Version 3.5
337
338 @table @emph
339 @item Targets
340 Using the new command @code{target}, you can select at runtime whether
341 you are debugging local files, local processes, standalone systems over
342 a serial port, realtime systems over a TCP/IP connection, etc. The
343 command @code{load} can download programs into a remote system. Serial
344 stubs are available for Motorola 680x0, Intel 80386, and Sparc remote
345 systems; GDB also supports debugging realtime processes running under
346 VxWorks, using SunRPC Remote Procedure Calls over TCP/IP to talk to a
347 debugger stub on the target system. Internally, GDB now uses a function
348 vector to mediate access to different targets; if you need to add your
349 own support for a remote protocol, this makes it much easier.
350
351 @item Watchpoints
352 GDB now sports watchpoints as well as breakpoints. You can use a
353 watchpoint to stop execution whenever the value of an expression
354 changes, without having to predict a particular place in your program
355 where this may happen.
356
357 @item Wide Output
358 Commands that issue wide output now insert newlines at places designed
359 to make the output more readable.
360
361 @item Object Code Formats
362 GDB uses a new library called the Binary File Descriptor (BFD) Library
363 to permit it to switch dynamically, without reconfiguration or
364 recompilation, between different object-file formats. Formats currently
365 supported are COFF, ELF, a.out, Intel 960 b.out, MIPS ECOFF, HPPA SOM
366 (with stabs debugging), and S-records; files may be read as .o files,
367 archive libraries, or core dumps. BFD is available as a subroutine
368 library so that other programs may take advantage of it, and the other
369 GNU binary utilities are being converted to use it.
370
371 @item Configuration and Ports
372 Compile-time configuration (to select a particular architecture and
373 operating system) is much easier. The script @code{configure} now
374 allows you to configure GDB as either a native debugger or a
375 cross-debugger. @xref{Installing GDB}, for details on how to
376 configure.
377
378 @item Interaction
379 The user interface to the GDB control variables is simpler,
380 and is consolidated in two commands, @code{set} and @code{show}. Output
381 lines are now broken at readable places, rather than overflowing onto
382 the next line. You can suppress output of machine-level addresses,
383 displaying only source language information.
384
385 @item C++
386 GDB now supports C++ multiple inheritance (if used with a GCC
387 version 2 compiler), and also has limited support for C++ exception
388 handling, with the commands @code{catch} and @code{info catch}: GDB
389 can break when an exception is raised, before the stack is peeled back
390 to the exception handler's context.
391
392 @ifset MOD2
393 @item Modula-2
394 GDB now has preliminary support for the GNU Modula-2 compiler, currently
395 under development at the State University of New York at Buffalo.
396 Coordinated development of both GDB and the GNU Modula-2 compiler will
397 continue. Other Modula-2 compilers are currently not supported, and
398 attempting to debug programs compiled with them will likely result in an
399 error as the symbol table of the executable is read in.
400 @end ifset
401
402 @item Command Rationalization
403 Many GDB commands have been renamed to make them easier to remember
404 and use. In particular, the subcommands of @code{info} and
405 @code{show}/@code{set} are grouped to make the former refer to the state
406 of your program, and the latter refer to the state of GDB itself.
407 @xref{Renamed Commands}, for details on what commands were renamed.
408
409 @item Shared Libraries
410 GDB 4 can debug programs and core files that use SunOS, SVR4, or IBM RS/6000
411 shared libraries.
412
413 @item Reference Card
414 GDB 4 has a reference card. @xref{Formatting Documentation,,Formatting
415 the Documentation}, for instructions about how to print it.
416 @end table
417 @end ifset
418
419 @ifclear BARETARGET
420 @node Sample Session
421 @chapter A Sample @value{GDBN} Session
422
423 You can use this manual at your leisure to read all about @value{GDBN}.
424 However, a handful of commands are enough to get started using the
425 debugger. This chapter illustrates those commands.
426
427 @iftex
428 In this sample session, we emphasize user input like this: @b{input},
429 to make it easier to pick out from the surrounding output.
430 @end iftex
431
432 @c FIXME: this example may not be appropriate for some configs, where
433 @c FIXME...primary interest is in remote use.
434
435 One of the preliminary versions of GNU @code{m4} (a generic macro
436 processor) exhibits the following bug: sometimes, when we change its
437 quote strings from the default, the commands used to capture one macro
438 definition within another stop working. In the following short @code{m4}
439 session, we define a macro @code{foo} which expands to @code{0000}; we
440 then use the @code{m4} built-in @code{defn} to define @code{bar} as the
441 same thing. However, when we change the open quote string to
442 @code{<QUOTE>} and the close quote string to @code{<UNQUOTE>}, the same
443 procedure fails to define a new synonym @code{baz}:
444
445 @smallexample
446 $ @b{cd gnu/m4}
447 $ @b{./m4}
448 @b{define(foo,0000)}
449
450 @b{foo}
451 0000
452 @b{define(bar,defn(`foo'))}
453
454 @b{bar}
455 0000
456 @b{changequote(<QUOTE>,<UNQUOTE>)}
457
458 @b{define(baz,defn(<QUOTE>foo<UNQUOTE>))}
459 @b{baz}
460 @b{C-d}
461 m4: End of input: 0: fatal error: EOF in string
462 @end smallexample
463
464 @noindent
465 Let us use @value{GDBN} to try to see what is going on.
466
467 @smallexample
468 $ @b{@value{GDBP} m4}
469 @c FIXME: this falsifies the exact text played out, to permit smallbook
470 @c FIXME... format to come out better.
471 GDB is free software and you are welcome to distribute copies
472 of it under certain conditions; type "show copying" to see
473 the conditions.
474 There is absolutely no warranty for GDB; type "show warranty"
475 for details.
476 GDB @value{GDBVN}, Copyright 1993 Free Software Foundation, Inc...
477 (@value{GDBP})
478 @end smallexample
479
480 @noindent
481 @value{GDBN} reads only enough symbol data to know where to find the rest when
482 needed; as a result, the first prompt comes up very quickly. We now
483 tell @value{GDBN} to use a narrower display width than usual, so that examples
484 will fit in this manual.
485
486 @smallexample
487 (@value{GDBP}) @b{set width 70}
488 @end smallexample
489
490 @noindent
491 We need to see how the @code{m4} built-in @code{changequote} works.
492 Having looked at the source, we know the relevant subroutine is
493 @code{m4_changequote}, so we set a breakpoint there with the @value{GDBN}
494 @code{break} command.
495
496 @smallexample
497 (@value{GDBP}) @b{break m4_changequote}
498 Breakpoint 1 at 0x62f4: file builtin.c, line 879.
499 @end smallexample
500
501 @noindent
502 Using the @code{run} command, we start @code{m4} running under @value{GDBN}
503 control; as long as control does not reach the @code{m4_changequote}
504 subroutine, the program runs as usual:
505
506 @smallexample
507 (@value{GDBP}) @b{run}
508 Starting program: /work/Editorial/gdb/gnu/m4/m4
509 @b{define(foo,0000)}
510
511 @b{foo}
512 0000
513 @end smallexample
514
515 @noindent
516 To trigger the breakpoint, we call @code{changequote}. @value{GDBN}
517 suspends execution of @code{m4}, displaying information about the
518 context where it stops.
519
520 @smallexample
521 @b{changequote(<QUOTE>,<UNQUOTE>)}
522
523 Breakpoint 1, m4_changequote (argc=3, argv=0x33c70)
524 at builtin.c:879
525 879 if (bad_argc(TOKEN_DATA_TEXT(argv[0]),argc,1,3))
526 @end smallexample
527
528 @noindent
529 Now we use the command @code{n} (@code{next}) to advance execution to
530 the next line of the current function.
531
532 @smallexample
533 (@value{GDBP}) @b{n}
534 882 set_quotes((argc >= 2) ? TOKEN_DATA_TEXT(argv[1])\
535 : nil,
536 @end smallexample
537
538 @noindent
539 @code{set_quotes} looks like a promising subroutine. We can go into it
540 by using the command @code{s} (@code{step}) instead of @code{next}.
541 @code{step} goes to the next line to be executed in @emph{any}
542 subroutine, so it steps into @code{set_quotes}.
543
544 @smallexample
545 (@value{GDBP}) @b{s}
546 set_quotes (lq=0x34c78 "<QUOTE>", rq=0x34c88 "<UNQUOTE>")
547 at input.c:530
548 530 if (lquote != def_lquote)
549 @end smallexample
550
551 @noindent
552 The display that shows the subroutine where @code{m4} is now
553 suspended (and its arguments) is called a stack frame display. It
554 shows a summary of the stack. We can use the @code{backtrace}
555 command (which can also be spelled @code{bt}), to see where we are
556 in the stack as a whole: the @code{backtrace} command displays a
557 stack frame for each active subroutine.
558
559 @smallexample
560 (@value{GDBP}) @b{bt}
561 #0 set_quotes (lq=0x34c78 "<QUOTE>", rq=0x34c88 "<UNQUOTE>")
562 at input.c:530
563 #1 0x6344 in m4_changequote (argc=3, argv=0x33c70)
564 at builtin.c:882
565 #2 0x8174 in expand_macro (sym=0x33320) at macro.c:242
566 #3 0x7a88 in expand_token (obs=0x0, t=209696, td=0xf7fffa30)
567 at macro.c:71
568 #4 0x79dc in expand_input () at macro.c:40
569 #5 0x2930 in main (argc=0, argv=0xf7fffb20) at m4.c:195
570 @end smallexample
571
572 @noindent
573 We will step through a few more lines to see what happens. The first two
574 times, we can use @samp{s}; the next two times we use @code{n} to avoid
575 falling into the @code{xstrdup} subroutine.
576
577 @smallexample
578 (@value{GDBP}) @b{s}
579 0x3b5c 532 if (rquote != def_rquote)
580 (@value{GDBP}) @b{s}
581 0x3b80 535 lquote = (lq == nil || *lq == '\0') ? \
582 def_lquote : xstrdup(lq);
583 (@value{GDBP}) @b{n}
584 536 rquote = (rq == nil || *rq == '\0') ? def_rquote\
585 : xstrdup(rq);
586 (@value{GDBP}) @b{n}
587 538 len_lquote = strlen(rquote);
588 @end smallexample
589
590 @noindent
591 The last line displayed looks a little odd; we can examine the variables
592 @code{lquote} and @code{rquote} to see if they are in fact the new left
593 and right quotes we specified. We use the command @code{p}
594 (@code{print}) to see their values.
595
596 @smallexample
597 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p lquote}
598 $1 = 0x35d40 "<QUOTE>"
599 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p rquote}
600 $2 = 0x35d50 "<UNQUOTE>"
601 @end smallexample
602
603 @noindent
604 @code{lquote} and @code{rquote} are indeed the new left and right quotes.
605 To look at some context, we can display ten lines of source
606 surrounding the current line with the @code{l} (@code{list}) command.
607
608 @smallexample
609 (@value{GDBP}) @b{l}
610 533 xfree(rquote);
611 534
612 535 lquote = (lq == nil || *lq == '\0') ? def_lquote\
613 : xstrdup (lq);
614 536 rquote = (rq == nil || *rq == '\0') ? def_rquote\
615 : xstrdup (rq);
616 537
617 538 len_lquote = strlen(rquote);
618 539 len_rquote = strlen(lquote);
619 540 @}
620 541
621 542 void
622 @end smallexample
623
624 @noindent
625 Let us step past the two lines that set @code{len_lquote} and
626 @code{len_rquote}, and then examine the values of those variables.
627
628 @smallexample
629 (@value{GDBP}) @b{n}
630 539 len_rquote = strlen(lquote);
631 (@value{GDBP}) @b{n}
632 540 @}
633 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p len_lquote}
634 $3 = 9
635 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p len_rquote}
636 $4 = 7
637 @end smallexample
638
639 @noindent
640 That certainly looks wrong, assuming @code{len_lquote} and
641 @code{len_rquote} are meant to be the lengths of @code{lquote} and
642 @code{rquote} respectively. We can set them to better values using
643 the @code{p} command, since it can print the value of
644 any expression---and that expression can include subroutine calls and
645 assignments.
646
647 @smallexample
648 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p len_lquote=strlen(lquote)}
649 $5 = 7
650 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p len_rquote=strlen(rquote)}
651 $6 = 9
652 @end smallexample
653
654 @noindent
655 Is that enough to fix the problem of using the new quotes with the
656 @code{m4} built-in @code{defn}? We can allow @code{m4} to continue
657 executing with the @code{c} (@code{continue}) command, and then try the
658 example that caused trouble initially:
659
660 @smallexample
661 (@value{GDBP}) @b{c}
662 Continuing.
663
664 @b{define(baz,defn(<QUOTE>foo<UNQUOTE>))}
665
666 baz
667 0000
668 @end smallexample
669
670 @noindent
671 Success! The new quotes now work just as well as the default ones. The
672 problem seems to have been just the two typos defining the wrong
673 lengths. We allow @code{m4} exit by giving it an EOF as input:
674
675 @smallexample
676 @b{C-d}
677 Program exited normally.
678 @end smallexample
679
680 @noindent
681 The message @samp{Program exited normally.} is from @value{GDBN}; it
682 indicates @code{m4} has finished executing. We can end our @value{GDBN}
683 session with the @value{GDBN} @code{quit} command.
684
685 @smallexample
686 (@value{GDBP}) @b{quit}
687 @end smallexample
688 @end ifclear
689
690 @node Invocation
691 @chapter Getting In and Out of @value{GDBN}
692
693 This chapter discusses how to start @value{GDBN}, and how to get out of it.
694 (The essentials: type @samp{@value{GDBP}} to start GDB, and type @kbd{quit}
695 or @kbd{C-d} to exit.)
696
697 @menu
698 * Invoking GDB:: How to start @value{GDBN}
699 * Quitting GDB:: How to quit @value{GDBN}
700 * Shell Commands:: How to use shell commands inside @value{GDBN}
701 @end menu
702
703 @node Invoking GDB
704 @section Invoking @value{GDBN}
705
706 @ifset H8EXCLUSIVE
707 For details on starting up @value{GDBP} as a
708 remote debugger attached to a Hitachi microprocessor, see @ref{Hitachi
709 Remote,,@value{GDBN} and Hitachi Microprocessors}.
710 @end ifset
711
712 Invoke @value{GDBN} by running the program @code{@value{GDBP}}. Once started,
713 @value{GDBN} reads commands from the terminal until you tell it to exit.
714
715 You can also run @code{@value{GDBP}} with a variety of arguments and options,
716 to specify more of your debugging environment at the outset.
717
718 @ifset GENERIC
719 The command-line options described here are designed
720 to cover a variety of situations; in some environments, some of these
721 options may effectively be unavailable.
722 @end ifset
723
724 The most usual way to start @value{GDBN} is with one argument,
725 specifying an executable program:
726
727 @example
728 @value{GDBP} @var{program}
729 @end example
730
731 @ifclear BARETARGET
732 @noindent
733 You can also start with both an executable program and a core file
734 specified:
735
736 @example
737 @value{GDBP} @var{program} @var{core}
738 @end example
739
740 You can, instead, specify a process ID as a second argument, if you want
741 to debug a running process:
742
743 @example
744 @value{GDBP} @var{program} 1234
745 @end example
746
747 @noindent
748 would attach @value{GDBN} to process @code{1234} (unless you also have a file
749 named @file{1234}; @value{GDBN} does check for a core file first).
750
751 Taking advantage of the second command-line argument requires a fairly
752 complete operating system; when you use @value{GDBN} as a remote debugger
753 attached to a bare board, there may not be any notion of ``process'',
754 and there is often no way to get a core dump.
755 @end ifclear
756
757 @noindent
758 You can further control how @value{GDBN} starts up by using command-line
759 options. @value{GDBN} itself can remind you of the options available.
760
761 @noindent
762 Type
763
764 @example
765 @value{GDBP} -help
766 @end example
767
768 @noindent
769 to display all available options and briefly describe their use
770 (@samp{@value{GDBP} -h} is a shorter equivalent).
771
772 All options and command line arguments you give are processed
773 in sequential order. The order makes a difference when the
774 @samp{-x} option is used.
775
776
777 @menu
778 @ifclear GENERIC
779 @ifset REMOTESTUB
780 * Remote Serial:: @value{GDBN} remote serial protocol
781 @end ifset
782 @ifset I960
783 * i960-Nindy Remote:: @value{GDBN} with a remote i960 (Nindy)
784 @end ifset
785 @ifset AMD29K
786 * UDI29K Remote:: @value{GDBN} and the UDI protocol for AMD29K
787 * EB29K Remote:: @value{GDBN} with a remote EB29K
788 @end ifset
789 @ifset VXWORKS
790 * VxWorks Remote:: @value{GDBN} and VxWorks
791 @end ifset
792 @ifset ST2000
793 * ST2000 Remote:: @value{GDBN} with a Tandem ST2000
794 @end ifset
795 @ifset H8
796 * Hitachi Remote:: @value{GDBN} and Hitachi Microprocessors
797 @end ifset
798 @ifset MIPS
799 * MIPS Remote:: @value{GDBN} and MIPS boards
800 @end ifset
801 @ifset SIMS
802 * Simulator:: Simulated CPU target
803 @end ifset
804 @end ifclear
805 @c remnant makeinfo bug requires this blank line after *two* end-ifblahs:
806
807 * File Options:: Choosing files
808 * Mode Options:: Choosing modes
809 @end menu
810
811 @ifclear GENERIC
812 @include remote.texi
813 @end ifclear
814
815 @node File Options
816 @subsection Choosing files
817
818 @ifclear BARETARGET
819 When @value{GDBN} starts, it reads any arguments other than options as
820 specifying an executable file and core file (or process ID). This is
821 the same as if the arguments were specified by the @samp{-se} and
822 @samp{-c} options respectively. (@value{GDBN} reads the first argument
823 that does not have an associated option flag as equivalent to the
824 @samp{-se} option followed by that argument; and the second argument
825 that does not have an associated option flag, if any, as equivalent to
826 the @samp{-c} option followed by that argument.)
827 @end ifclear
828 @ifset BARETARGET
829 When @value{GDBN} starts, it reads any argument other than options as
830 specifying an executable file. This is the same as if the argument was
831 specified by the @samp{-se} option.
832 @end ifset
833
834 Many options have both long and short forms; both are shown in the
835 following list. @value{GDBN} also recognizes the long forms if you truncate
836 them, so long as enough of the option is present to be unambiguous.
837 (If you prefer, you can flag option arguments with @samp{--} rather
838 than @samp{-}, though we illustrate the more usual convention.)
839
840 @table @code
841 @item -symbols @var{file}
842 @itemx -s @var{file}
843 Read symbol table from file @var{file}.
844
845 @item -exec @var{file}
846 @itemx -e @var{file}
847 Use file @var{file} as the executable file to execute when
848 @ifset BARETARGET
849 appropriate.
850 @end ifset
851 @ifclear BARETARGET
852 appropriate, and for examining pure data in conjunction with a core
853 dump.
854 @end ifclear
855
856 @item -se @var{file}
857 Read symbol table from file @var{file} and use it as the executable
858 file.
859
860 @ifclear BARETARGET
861 @item -core @var{file}
862 @itemx -c @var{file}
863 Use file @var{file} as a core dump to examine.
864
865 @item -c @var{number}
866 Connect to process ID @var{number}, as with the @code{attach} command
867 (unless there is a file in core-dump format named @var{number}, in which
868 case @samp{-c} specifies that file as a core dump to read).
869 @end ifclear
870
871 @item -command @var{file}
872 @itemx -x @var{file}
873 Execute @value{GDBN} commands from file @var{file}. @xref{Command
874 Files,, Command files}.
875
876 @item -directory @var{directory}
877 @itemx -d @var{directory}
878 Add @var{directory} to the path to search for source files.
879
880 @ifclear BARETARGET
881 @item -m
882 @itemx -mapped
883 @emph{Warning: this option depends on operating system facilities that are not
884 supported on all systems.}@*
885 If memory-mapped files are available on your system through the @code{mmap}
886 system call, you can use this option
887 to have @value{GDBN} write the symbols from your
888 program into a reusable file in the current directory. If the program you are debugging is
889 called @file{/tmp/fred}, the mapped symbol file will be @file{./fred.syms}.
890 Future @value{GDBN} debugging sessions will notice the presence of this file,
891 and will quickly map in symbol information from it, rather than reading
892 the symbol table from the executable program.
893
894 @c FIXME! Really host, not target?
895 The @file{.syms} file is specific to the host machine where @value{GDBN}
896 is run. It holds an exact image of the internal @value{GDBN} symbol
897 table. It cannot be shared across multiple host platforms.
898 @end ifclear
899
900 @item -r
901 @itemx -readnow
902 Read each symbol file's entire symbol table immediately, rather than
903 the default, which is to read it incrementally as it is needed.
904 This makes startup slower, but makes future operations faster.
905 @end table
906
907 @ifclear BARETARGET
908 The @code{-mapped} and @code{-readnow} options are typically combined in
909 order to build a @file{.syms} file that contains complete symbol
910 information. (@xref{Files,,Commands to specify files}, for information
911 on @file{.syms} files.) A simple GDB invocation to do nothing but build
912 a @file{.syms} file for future use is:
913
914 @example
915 gdb -batch -nx -mapped -readnow programname
916 @end example
917 @end ifclear
918
919 @node Mode Options
920 @subsection Choosing modes
921
922 You can run @value{GDBN} in various alternative modes---for example, in
923 batch mode or quiet mode.
924
925 @table @code
926 @item -nx
927 @itemx -n
928 Do not execute commands from any initialization files (normally called
929 @file{@value{GDBINIT}}). Normally, the commands in these files are
930 executed after all the command options and arguments have been
931 processed. @xref{Command Files,,Command files}.
932
933 @item -quiet
934 @itemx -q
935 ``Quiet''. Do not print the introductory and copyright messages. These
936 messages are also suppressed in batch mode.
937
938 @item -batch
939 Run in batch mode. Exit with status @code{0} after processing all the
940 command files specified with @samp{-x} (and all commands from
941 initialization files, if not inhibited with @samp{-n}). Exit with
942 nonzero status if an error occurs in executing the @value{GDBN} commands
943 in the command files.
944
945 Batch mode may be useful for running @value{GDBN} as a filter, for example to
946 download and run a program on another computer; in order to make this
947 more useful, the message
948
949 @example
950 Program exited normally.
951 @end example
952
953 @noindent
954 (which is ordinarily issued whenever a program running under @value{GDBN} control
955 terminates) is not issued when running in batch mode.
956
957 @item -cd @var{directory}
958 Run @value{GDBN} using @var{directory} as its working directory,
959 instead of the current directory.
960
961 @ifset LUCID
962 @item -context @var{authentication}
963 When the Energize programming system starts up @value{GDBN}, it uses this
964 option to trigger an alternate mode of interaction.
965 @var{authentication} is a pair of numeric codes that identify @value{GDBN}
966 as a client in the Energize environment. Avoid this option when you run
967 @value{GDBN} directly from the command line. See @ref{Energize,,Using
968 @value{GDBN} with Energize} for more discussion of using @value{GDBN} with Energize.
969 @end ifset
970
971 @ifclear DOSHOST
972 @item -fullname
973 @itemx -f
974 Emacs sets this option when it runs @value{GDBN} as a subprocess. It tells @value{GDBN}
975 to output the full file name and line number in a standard,
976 recognizable fashion each time a stack frame is displayed (which
977 includes each time your program stops). This recognizable format looks
978 like two @samp{\032} characters, followed by the file name, line number
979 and character position separated by colons, and a newline. The
980 Emacs-to-@value{GDBN} interface program uses the two @samp{\032} characters as
981 a signal to display the source code for the frame.
982 @end ifclear
983
984 @ifset SERIAL
985 @item -b @var{bps}
986 Set the line speed (baud rate or bits per second) of any serial
987 interface used by @value{GDBN} for remote debugging.
988
989 @item -tty @var{device}
990 Run using @var{device} for your program's standard input and output.
991 @c FIXME: kingdon thinks there is more to -tty. Investigate.
992 @end ifset
993 @end table
994
995 @node Quitting GDB
996 @section Quitting @value{GDBN}
997 @cindex exiting @value{GDBN}
998 @cindex leaving @value{GDBN}
999
1000 @table @code
1001 @item quit
1002 @kindex quit
1003 @kindex q
1004 To exit @value{GDBN}, use the @code{quit} command (abbreviated @code{q}), or type
1005 an end-of-file character (usually @kbd{C-d}).
1006 @end table
1007
1008 @cindex interrupt
1009 An interrupt (often @kbd{C-c}) will not exit from @value{GDBN}, but rather
1010 will terminate the action of any @value{GDBN} command that is in progress and
1011 return to @value{GDBN} command level. It is safe to type the interrupt
1012 character at any time because @value{GDBN} does not allow it to take effect
1013 until a time when it is safe.
1014
1015 @ifclear BARETARGET
1016 If you have been using @value{GDBN} to control an attached process or
1017 device, you can release it with the @code{detach} command
1018 (@pxref{Attach, ,Debugging an already-running process}).
1019 @end ifclear
1020
1021 @node Shell Commands
1022 @section Shell commands
1023
1024 If you need to execute occasional shell commands during your
1025 debugging session, there is no need to leave or suspend @value{GDBN}; you can
1026 just use the @code{shell} command.
1027
1028 @table @code
1029 @item shell @var{command string}
1030 @kindex shell
1031 @cindex shell escape
1032 Invoke a the standard shell to execute @var{command string}.
1033 @ifclear DOSHOST
1034 If it exists, the environment variable @code{SHELL} determines which
1035 shell to run. Otherwise @value{GDBN} uses @code{/bin/sh}.
1036 @end ifclear
1037 @end table
1038
1039 The utility @code{make} is often needed in development environments.
1040 You do not have to use the @code{shell} command for this purpose in
1041 @value{GDBN}:
1042
1043 @table @code
1044 @item make @var{make-args}
1045 @kindex make
1046 @cindex calling make
1047 Execute the @code{make} program with the specified
1048 arguments. This is equivalent to @samp{shell make @var{make-args}}.
1049 @end table
1050
1051 @node Commands
1052 @chapter @value{GDBN} Commands
1053
1054 You can abbreviate a @value{GDBN} command to the first few letters of the command
1055 name, if that abbreviation is unambiguous; and you can repeat certain
1056 @value{GDBN} commands by typing just @key{RET}. You can also use the @key{TAB}
1057 key to get @value{GDBN} to fill out the rest of a word in a command (or to
1058 show you the alternatives available, if there is more than one possibility).
1059
1060 @menu
1061 * Command Syntax:: How to give commands to @value{GDBN}
1062 * Completion:: Command completion
1063 * Help:: How to ask @value{GDBN} for help
1064 @end menu
1065
1066 @node Command Syntax
1067 @section Command syntax
1068
1069 A @value{GDBN} command is a single line of input. There is no limit on
1070 how long it can be. It starts with a command name, which is followed by
1071 arguments whose meaning depends on the command name. For example, the
1072 command @code{step} accepts an argument which is the number of times to
1073 step, as in @samp{step 5}. You can also use the @code{step} command
1074 with no arguments. Some command names do not allow any arguments.
1075
1076 @cindex abbreviation
1077 @value{GDBN} command names may always be truncated if that abbreviation is
1078 unambiguous. Other possible command abbreviations are listed in the
1079 documentation for individual commands. In some cases, even ambiguous
1080 abbreviations are allowed; for example, @code{s} is specially defined as
1081 equivalent to @code{step} even though there are other commands whose
1082 names start with @code{s}. You can test abbreviations by using them as
1083 arguments to the @code{help} command.
1084
1085 @cindex repeating commands
1086 @kindex RET
1087 A blank line as input to @value{GDBN} (typing just @key{RET}) means to
1088 repeat the previous command. Certain commands (for example, @code{run})
1089 will not repeat this way; these are commands for which unintentional
1090 repetition might cause trouble and which you are unlikely to want to
1091 repeat.
1092
1093 The @code{list} and @code{x} commands, when you repeat them with
1094 @key{RET}, construct new arguments rather than repeating
1095 exactly as typed. This permits easy scanning of source or memory.
1096
1097 @value{GDBN} can also use @key{RET} in another way: to partition lengthy
1098 output, in a way similar to the common utility @code{more}
1099 (@pxref{Screen Size,,Screen size}). Since it is easy to press one
1100 @key{RET} too many in this situation, @value{GDBN} disables command
1101 repetition after any command that generates this sort of display.
1102
1103 @kindex #
1104 @cindex comment
1105 Any text from a @kbd{#} to the end of the line is a comment; it does
1106 nothing. This is useful mainly in command files (@pxref{Command
1107 Files,,Command files}).
1108
1109 @node Completion
1110 @section Command completion
1111
1112 @cindex completion
1113 @cindex word completion
1114 @value{GDBN} can fill in the rest of a word in a command for you, if there is
1115 only one possibility; it can also show you what the valid possibilities
1116 are for the next word in a command, at any time. This works for @value{GDBN}
1117 commands, @value{GDBN} subcommands, and the names of symbols in your program.
1118
1119 Press the @key{TAB} key whenever you want @value{GDBN} to fill out the rest
1120 of a word. If there is only one possibility, @value{GDBN} will fill in the
1121 word, and wait for you to finish the command (or press @key{RET} to
1122 enter it). For example, if you type
1123
1124 @c FIXME "@key" does not distinguish its argument sufficiently to permit
1125 @c complete accuracy in these examples; space introduced for clarity.
1126 @c If texinfo enhancements make it unnecessary, it would be nice to
1127 @c replace " @key" by "@key" in the following...
1128 @example
1129 (@value{GDBP}) info bre @key{TAB}
1130 @end example
1131
1132 @noindent
1133 @value{GDBN} fills in the rest of the word @samp{breakpoints}, since that is
1134 the only @code{info} subcommand beginning with @samp{bre}:
1135
1136 @example
1137 (@value{GDBP}) info breakpoints
1138 @end example
1139
1140 @noindent
1141 You can either press @key{RET} at this point, to run the @code{info
1142 breakpoints} command, or backspace and enter something else, if
1143 @samp{breakpoints} does not look like the command you expected. (If you
1144 were sure you wanted @code{info breakpoints} in the first place, you
1145 might as well just type @key{RET} immediately after @samp{info bre},
1146 to exploit command abbreviations rather than command completion).
1147
1148 If there is more than one possibility for the next word when you press
1149 @key{TAB}, @value{GDBN} will sound a bell. You can either supply more
1150 characters and try again, or just press @key{TAB} a second time, and
1151 @value{GDBN} will display all the possible completions for that word. For
1152 example, you might want to set a breakpoint on a subroutine whose name
1153 begins with @samp{make_}, but when you type @kbd{b make_@key{TAB}} @value{GDBN}
1154 just sounds the bell. Typing @key{TAB} again will display all the
1155 function names in your program that begin with those characters, for
1156 example:
1157
1158 @example
1159 (@value{GDBP}) b make_ @key{TAB}
1160 @exdent @value{GDBN} sounds bell; press @key{TAB} again, to see:
1161 make_a_section_from_file make_environ
1162 make_abs_section make_function_type
1163 make_blockvector make_pointer_type
1164 make_cleanup make_reference_type
1165 make_command make_symbol_completion_list
1166 (@value{GDBP}) b make_
1167 @end example
1168
1169 @noindent
1170 After displaying the available possibilities, @value{GDBN} copies your
1171 partial input (@samp{b make_} in the example) so you can finish the
1172 command.
1173
1174 If you just want to see the list of alternatives in the first place, you
1175 can press @kbd{M-?} rather than pressing @key{TAB} twice. @kbd{M-?}
1176 means @kbd{@key{META} ?}. You can type this
1177 @ifclear DOSHOST
1178 either by holding down a
1179 key designated as the @key{META} shift on your keyboard (if there is
1180 one) while typing @kbd{?}, or
1181 @end ifclear
1182 as @key{ESC} followed by @kbd{?}.
1183
1184 @cindex quotes in commands
1185 @cindex completion of quoted strings
1186 Sometimes the string you need, while logically a ``word'', may contain
1187 parentheses or other characters that @value{GDBN} normally excludes from its
1188 notion of a word. To permit word completion to work in this situation,
1189 you may enclose words in @code{'} (single quote marks) in @value{GDBN} commands.
1190
1191 @ifclear CONLY
1192 The most likely situation where you might need this is in typing the
1193 name of a C++ function. This is because C++ allows function overloading
1194 (multiple definitions of the same function, distinguished by argument
1195 type). For example, when you want to set a breakpoint you may need to
1196 distinguish whether you mean the version of @code{name} that takes an
1197 @code{int} parameter, @code{name(int)}, or the version that takes a
1198 @code{float} parameter, @code{name(float)}. To use the word-completion
1199 facilities in this situation, type a single quote @code{'} at the
1200 beginning of the function name. This alerts @value{GDBN} that it may need to
1201 consider more information than usual when you press @key{TAB} or
1202 @kbd{M-?} to request word completion:
1203
1204 @example
1205 (@value{GDBP}) b 'bubble( @key{M-?}
1206 bubble(double,double) bubble(int,int)
1207 (@value{GDBP}) b 'bubble(
1208 @end example
1209
1210 In some cases, @value{GDBN} can tell that completing a name will require
1211 quotes. When this happens, @value{GDBN} will insert the quote for you (while
1212 completing as much as it can) if you do not type the quote in the first
1213 place:
1214
1215 @example
1216 (@value{GDBP}) b bub @key{TAB}
1217 @exdent @value{GDBN} alters your input line to the following, and rings a bell:
1218 (@value{GDBP}) b 'bubble(
1219 @end example
1220
1221 @noindent
1222 In general, @value{GDBN} can tell that a quote is needed (and inserts it) if
1223 you have not yet started typing the argument list when you ask for
1224 completion on an overloaded symbol.
1225 @end ifclear
1226
1227
1228 @node Help
1229 @section Getting help
1230 @cindex online documentation
1231 @kindex help
1232
1233 You can always ask @value{GDBN} itself for information on its commands, using the
1234 command @code{help}.
1235
1236 @table @code
1237 @item help
1238 @itemx h
1239 @kindex h
1240 You can use @code{help} (abbreviated @code{h}) with no arguments to
1241 display a short list of named classes of commands:
1242
1243 @smallexample
1244 (@value{GDBP}) help
1245 List of classes of commands:
1246
1247 running -- Running the program
1248 stack -- Examining the stack
1249 data -- Examining data
1250 breakpoints -- Making program stop at certain points
1251 files -- Specifying and examining files
1252 status -- Status inquiries
1253 support -- Support facilities
1254 user-defined -- User-defined commands
1255 aliases -- Aliases of other commands
1256 obscure -- Obscure features
1257
1258 Type "help" followed by a class name for a list of
1259 commands in that class.
1260 Type "help" followed by command name for full
1261 documentation.
1262 Command name abbreviations are allowed if unambiguous.
1263 (@value{GDBP})
1264 @end smallexample
1265
1266 @item help @var{class}
1267 Using one of the general help classes as an argument, you can get a
1268 list of the individual commands in that class. For example, here is the
1269 help display for the class @code{status}:
1270
1271 @smallexample
1272 (@value{GDBP}) help status
1273 Status inquiries.
1274
1275 List of commands:
1276
1277 @c Line break in "show" line falsifies real output, but needed
1278 @c to fit in smallbook page size.
1279 show -- Generic command for showing things set
1280 with "set"
1281 info -- Generic command for printing status
1282
1283 Type "help" followed by command name for full
1284 documentation.
1285 Command name abbreviations are allowed if unambiguous.
1286 (@value{GDBP})
1287 @end smallexample
1288
1289 @item help @var{command}
1290 With a command name as @code{help} argument, @value{GDBN} will display a
1291 short paragraph on how to use that command.
1292 @end table
1293
1294 In addition to @code{help}, you can use the @value{GDBN} commands @code{info}
1295 and @code{show} to inquire about the state of your program, or the state
1296 of @value{GDBN} itself. Each command supports many topics of inquiry; this
1297 manual introduces each of them in the appropriate context. The listings
1298 under @code{info} and under @code{show} in the Index point to
1299 all the sub-commands. @xref{Index}.
1300
1301 @c @group
1302 @table @code
1303 @item info
1304 @kindex info
1305 @kindex i
1306 This command (abbreviated @code{i}) is for describing the state of your
1307 program. For example, you can list the arguments given to your program
1308 with @code{info args}, list the registers currently in use with @code{info
1309 registers}, or list the breakpoints you have set with @code{info breakpoints}.
1310 You can get a complete list of the @code{info} sub-commands with
1311 @w{@code{help info}}.
1312
1313 @kindex show
1314 @item show
1315 In contrast, @code{show} is for describing the state of @value{GDBN} itself.
1316 You can change most of the things you can @code{show}, by using the
1317 related command @code{set}; for example, you can control what number
1318 system is used for displays with @code{set radix}, or simply inquire
1319 which is currently in use with @code{show radix}.
1320
1321 @kindex info set
1322 To display all the settable parameters and their current
1323 values, you can use @code{show} with no arguments; you may also use
1324 @code{info set}. Both commands produce the same display.
1325 @c FIXME: "info set" violates the rule that "info" is for state of
1326 @c FIXME...program. Ck w/ GNU: "info set" to be called something else,
1327 @c FIXME...or change desc of rule---eg "state of prog and debugging session"?
1328 @end table
1329 @c @end group
1330
1331 Here are three miscellaneous @code{show} subcommands, all of which are
1332 exceptional in lacking corresponding @code{set} commands:
1333
1334 @table @code
1335 @kindex show version
1336 @cindex version number
1337 @item show version
1338 Show what version of @value{GDBN} is running. You should include this
1339 information in @value{GDBN} bug-reports. If multiple versions of @value{GDBN} are in
1340 use at your site, you may occasionally want to determine which version
1341 of @value{GDBN} you are running; as @value{GDBN} evolves, new commands are introduced,
1342 and old ones may wither away. The version number is also announced
1343 when you start @value{GDBN}.
1344
1345 @kindex show copying
1346 @item show copying
1347 Display information about permission for copying @value{GDBN}.
1348
1349 @kindex show warranty
1350 @item show warranty
1351 Display the GNU ``NO WARRANTY'' statement.
1352 @end table
1353
1354 @node Running
1355 @chapter Running Programs Under @value{GDBN}
1356
1357 When you run a program under @value{GDBN}, you must first generate
1358 debugging information when you compile it.
1359 @ifclear BARETARGET
1360 You may start it with its arguments, if any, in an environment of your
1361 choice. You may redirect your program's input and output, debug an
1362 already running process, or kill a child process.
1363 @end ifclear
1364
1365 @menu
1366 * Compilation:: Compiling for debugging
1367 * Starting:: Starting your program
1368 @ifclear BARETARGET
1369 * Arguments:: Your program's arguments
1370 * Environment:: Your program's environment
1371 * Working Directory:: Your program's working directory
1372 * Input/Output:: Your program's input and output
1373 * Attach:: Debugging an already-running process
1374 * Kill Process:: Killing the child process
1375 * Process Information:: Additional process information
1376 @end ifclear
1377 @end menu
1378
1379 @node Compilation
1380 @section Compiling for debugging
1381
1382 In order to debug a program effectively, you need to generate
1383 debugging information when you compile it. This debugging information
1384 is stored in the object file; it describes the data type of each
1385 variable or function and the correspondence between source line numbers
1386 and addresses in the executable code.
1387
1388 To request debugging information, specify the @samp{-g} option when you run
1389 the compiler.
1390
1391 Many C compilers are unable to handle the @samp{-g} and @samp{-O}
1392 options together. Using those compilers, you cannot generate optimized
1393 executables containing debugging information.
1394
1395 @value{NGCC}, the GNU C compiler, supports @samp{-g} with or without
1396 @samp{-O}, making it possible to debug optimized code. We recommend
1397 that you @emph{always} use @samp{-g} whenever you compile a program.
1398 You may think your program is correct, but there is no sense in pushing
1399 your luck.
1400
1401 @cindex optimized code, debugging
1402 @cindex debugging optimized code
1403 When you debug a program compiled with @samp{-g -O}, remember that the
1404 optimizer is rearranging your code; the debugger will show you what is
1405 really there. Do not be too surprised when the execution path does not
1406 exactly match your source file! An extreme example: if you define a
1407 variable, but never use it, @value{GDBN} will never see that
1408 variable---because the compiler optimizes it out of existence.
1409
1410 Some things do not work as well with @samp{-g -O} as with just
1411 @samp{-g}, particularly on machines with instruction scheduling. If in
1412 doubt, recompile with @samp{-g} alone, and if this fixes the problem,
1413 please report it as a bug (including a test case!).
1414
1415 Older versions of the GNU C compiler permitted a variant option
1416 @w{@samp{-gg}} for debugging information. @value{GDBN} no longer supports this
1417 format; if your GNU C compiler has this option, do not use it.
1418
1419 @need 2000
1420 @node Starting
1421 @section Starting your program
1422 @cindex starting
1423 @cindex running
1424
1425 @table @code
1426 @item run
1427 @itemx r
1428 @kindex run
1429 Use the @code{run} command to start your program under @value{GDBN}. You must
1430 first specify the program name
1431 @ifset VXWORKS
1432 (except on VxWorks)
1433 @end ifset
1434 with an argument to @value{GDBN} (@pxref{Invocation, ,Getting In and
1435 Out of @value{GDBN}}), or by using the @code{file} or @code{exec-file}
1436 command (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to specify files}).
1437
1438 @end table
1439
1440 @ifclear BARETARGET
1441 If you are running your program in an execution environment that
1442 supports processes, @code{run} creates an inferior process and makes
1443 that process run your program. (In environments without processes,
1444 @code{run} jumps to the start of your program.)
1445
1446 The execution of a program is affected by certain information it
1447 receives from its superior. @value{GDBN} provides ways to specify this
1448 information, which you must do @emph{before} starting your program. (You
1449 can change it after starting your program, but such changes will only affect
1450 your program the next time you start it.) This information may be
1451 divided into four categories:
1452
1453 @table @asis
1454 @item The @emph{arguments.}
1455 Specify the arguments to give your program as the arguments of the
1456 @code{run} command. If a shell is available on your target, the shell
1457 is used to pass the arguments, so that you may use normal conventions
1458 (such as wildcard expansion or variable substitution) in describing
1459 the arguments. In Unix systems, you can control which shell is used
1460 with the @code{SHELL} environment variable. @xref{Arguments, ,Your
1461 program's arguments}.
1462
1463 @item The @emph{environment.}
1464 Your program normally inherits its environment from @value{GDBN}, but you can
1465 use the @value{GDBN} commands @code{set environment} and @code{unset
1466 environment} to change parts of the environment that will be given to
1467 your program. @xref{Environment, ,Your program's environment}.
1468
1469 @item The @emph{working directory.}
1470 Your program inherits its working directory from @value{GDBN}. You can set
1471 the @value{GDBN} working directory with the @code{cd} command in @value{GDBN}.
1472 @xref{Working Directory, ,Your program's working directory}.
1473
1474 @item The @emph{standard input and output.}
1475 Your program normally uses the same device for standard input and
1476 standard output as @value{GDBN} is using. You can redirect input and output
1477 in the @code{run} command line, or you can use the @code{tty} command to
1478 set a different device for your program.
1479 @xref{Input/Output, ,Your program's input and output}.
1480
1481 @cindex pipes
1482 @emph{Warning:} While input and output redirection work, you cannot use
1483 pipes to pass the output of the program you are debugging to another
1484 program; if you attempt this, @value{GDBN} is likely to wind up debugging the
1485 wrong program.
1486 @end table
1487 @end ifclear
1488
1489 When you issue the @code{run} command, your program begins to execute
1490 immediately. @xref{Stopping, ,Stopping and continuing}, for discussion
1491 of how to arrange for your program to stop. Once your program has
1492 stopped, you may call functions in your program, using the @code{print}
1493 or @code{call} commands. @xref{Data, ,Examining Data}.
1494
1495 If the modification time of your symbol file has changed since the
1496 last time @value{GDBN} read its symbols, @value{GDBN} will discard its symbol table and
1497 re-read it. When it does this, @value{GDBN} tries to retain your current
1498 breakpoints.
1499
1500 @ifclear BARETARGET
1501 @node Arguments
1502 @section Your program's arguments
1503
1504 @cindex arguments (to your program)
1505 The arguments to your program can be specified by the arguments of the
1506 @code{run} command. They are passed to a shell, which expands wildcard
1507 characters and performs redirection of I/O, and thence to your program.
1508 Your @code{SHELL} environment variable (if it exists) specifies what
1509 shell @value{GDBN} if you do not define @code{SHELL}, @value{GDBN} uses
1510 @code{/bin/sh}.
1511
1512 @code{run} with no arguments uses the same arguments used by the previous
1513 @code{run}, or those set by the @code{set args} command.
1514
1515 @kindex set args
1516 @table @code
1517 @item set args
1518 Specify the arguments to be used the next time your program is run. If
1519 @code{set args} has no arguments, @code{run} will execute your program
1520 with no arguments. Once you have run your program with arguments,
1521 using @code{set args} before the next @code{run} is the only way to run
1522 it again without arguments.
1523
1524 @item show args
1525 @kindex show args
1526 Show the arguments to give your program when it is started.
1527 @end table
1528
1529 @node Environment
1530 @section Your program's environment
1531
1532 @cindex environment (of your program)
1533 The @dfn{environment} consists of a set of environment variables and
1534 their values. Environment variables conventionally record such things as
1535 your user name, your home directory, your terminal type, and your search
1536 path for programs to run. Usually you set up environment variables with
1537 the shell and they are inherited by all the other programs you run. When
1538 debugging, it can be useful to try running your program with a modified
1539 environment without having to start @value{GDBN} over again.
1540
1541 @table @code
1542 @item path @var{directory}
1543 @kindex path
1544 Add @var{directory} to the front of the @code{PATH} environment variable
1545 (the search path for executables), for both @value{GDBN} and your program.
1546 You may specify several directory names, separated by @samp{:} or
1547 whitespace. If @var{directory} is already in the path, it is moved to
1548 the front, so it will be searched sooner.
1549
1550 You can use the string @samp{$cwd} to refer to whatever is the current
1551 working directory at the time @value{GDBN} searches the path. If you
1552 use @samp{.} instead, it refers to the directory where you executed the
1553 @code{path} command. @value{GDBN} replaces @samp{.} in the
1554 @var{directory} argument (with the current path) before adding
1555 @var{directory} to the search path.
1556 @c 'path' is explicitly nonrepeatable, but RMS points out it is silly to
1557 @c document that, since repeating it would be a no-op.
1558
1559 @item show paths
1560 @kindex show paths
1561 Display the list of search paths for executables (the @code{PATH}
1562 environment variable).
1563
1564 @item show environment @r{[}@var{varname}@r{]}
1565 @kindex show environment
1566 Print the value of environment variable @var{varname} to be given to
1567 your program when it starts. If you do not supply @var{varname},
1568 print the names and values of all environment variables to be given to
1569 your program. You can abbreviate @code{environment} as @code{env}.
1570
1571 @item set environment @var{varname} @r{[}=@r{]} @var{value}
1572 @kindex set environment
1573 Set environment variable @var{varname} to @var{value}. The value
1574 changes for your program only, not for @value{GDBN} itself. @var{value} may
1575 be any string; the values of environment variables are just strings, and
1576 any interpretation is supplied by your program itself. The @var{value}
1577 parameter is optional; if it is eliminated, the variable is set to a
1578 null value.
1579 @c "any string" here does not include leading, trailing
1580 @c blanks. Gnu asks: does anyone care?
1581
1582 For example, this command:
1583
1584 @example
1585 set env USER = foo
1586 @end example
1587
1588 @noindent
1589 tells a Unix program, when subsequently run, that its user is named
1590 @samp{foo}. (The spaces around @samp{=} are used for clarity here; they
1591 are not actually required.)
1592
1593 @item unset environment @var{varname}
1594 @kindex unset environment
1595 Remove variable @var{varname} from the environment to be passed to your
1596 program. This is different from @samp{set env @var{varname} =};
1597 @code{unset environment} removes the variable from the environment,
1598 rather than assigning it an empty value.
1599 @end table
1600
1601 @emph{Warning:} @value{GDBN} runs your program using the shell indicated
1602 by your @code{SHELL} environment variable if it exists (or
1603 @code{/bin/sh} if not). If your @code{SHELL} variable names a shell
1604 that runs an initialization file---such as @file{.cshrc} for C-shell, or
1605 @file{.bashrc} for BASH---any variables you set in that file will affect
1606 your program. You may wish to move setting of environment variables to
1607 files that are only run when you sign on, such as @file{.login} or
1608 @file{.profile}.
1609
1610 @node Working Directory
1611 @section Your program's working directory
1612
1613 @cindex working directory (of your program)
1614 Each time you start your program with @code{run}, it inherits its
1615 working directory from the current working directory of @value{GDBN}.
1616 The @value{GDBN} working directory is initially whatever it inherited
1617 from its parent process (typically the shell), but you can specify a new
1618 working directory in @value{GDBN} with the @code{cd} command.
1619
1620 The @value{GDBN} working directory also serves as a default for the commands
1621 that specify files for @value{GDBN} to operate on. @xref{Files, ,Commands to
1622 specify files}.
1623
1624 @table @code
1625 @item cd @var{directory}
1626 @kindex cd
1627 Set the @value{GDBN} working directory to @var{directory}.
1628
1629 @item pwd
1630 @kindex pwd
1631 Print the @value{GDBN} working directory.
1632 @end table
1633
1634 @node Input/Output
1635 @section Your program's input and output
1636
1637 @cindex redirection
1638 @cindex i/o
1639 @cindex terminal
1640 By default, the program you run under @value{GDBN} does input and output to
1641 the same terminal that @value{GDBN} uses. @value{GDBN} switches the terminal to
1642 its own terminal modes to interact with you, but it records the terminal
1643 modes your program was using and switches back to them when you continue
1644 running your program.
1645
1646 @table @code
1647 @item info terminal
1648 @kindex info terminal
1649 Displays information recorded by @value{GDBN} about the terminal modes your
1650 program is using.
1651 @end table
1652
1653 You can redirect your program's input and/or output using shell
1654 redirection with the @code{run} command. For example,
1655
1656 @example
1657 run > outfile
1658 @end example
1659
1660 @noindent
1661 starts your program, diverting its output to the file @file{outfile}.
1662
1663 @kindex tty
1664 @cindex controlling terminal
1665 Another way to specify where your program should do input and output is
1666 with the @code{tty} command. This command accepts a file name as
1667 argument, and causes this file to be the default for future @code{run}
1668 commands. It also resets the controlling terminal for the child
1669 process, for future @code{run} commands. For example,
1670
1671 @example
1672 tty /dev/ttyb
1673 @end example
1674
1675 @noindent
1676 directs that processes started with subsequent @code{run} commands
1677 default to do input and output on the terminal @file{/dev/ttyb} and have
1678 that as their controlling terminal.
1679
1680 An explicit redirection in @code{run} overrides the @code{tty} command's
1681 effect on the input/output device, but not its effect on the controlling
1682 terminal.
1683
1684 When you use the @code{tty} command or redirect input in the @code{run}
1685 command, only the input @emph{for your program} is affected. The input
1686 for @value{GDBN} still comes from your terminal.
1687
1688 @node Attach
1689 @section Debugging an already-running process
1690 @kindex attach
1691 @cindex attach
1692
1693 @table @code
1694 @item attach @var{process-id}
1695 This command attaches to a running process---one that was started
1696 outside @value{GDBN}. (@code{info files} will show your active
1697 targets.) The command takes as argument a process ID. The usual way to
1698 find out the process-id of a Unix process is with the @code{ps} utility,
1699 or with the @samp{jobs -l} shell command.
1700
1701 @code{attach} will not repeat if you press @key{RET} a second time after
1702 executing the command.
1703 @end table
1704
1705 To use @code{attach}, your program must be running in an environment
1706 which supports processes; for example, @code{attach} does not work for
1707 programs on bare-board targets that lack an operating system. You must
1708 also have permission to send the process a signal.
1709
1710 When using @code{attach}, you should first use the @code{file} command
1711 to specify the program running in the process and load its symbol table.
1712 @xref{Files, ,Commands to Specify Files}.
1713
1714 The first thing @value{GDBN} does after arranging to debug the specified
1715 process is to stop it. You can examine and modify an attached process
1716 with all the @value{GDBN} commands that are ordinarily available when you start
1717 processes with @code{run}. You can insert breakpoints; you can step and
1718 continue; you can modify storage. If you would rather the process
1719 continue running, you may use the @code{continue} command after
1720 attaching @value{GDBN} to the process.
1721
1722 @table @code
1723 @item detach
1724 @kindex detach
1725 When you have finished debugging the attached process, you can use the
1726 @code{detach} command to release it from @value{GDBN} control. Detaching
1727 the process continues its execution. After the @code{detach} command,
1728 that process and @value{GDBN} become completely independent once more, and you
1729 are ready to @code{attach} another process or start one with @code{run}.
1730 @code{detach} will not repeat if you press @key{RET} again after
1731 executing the command.
1732 @end table
1733
1734 If you exit @value{GDBN} or use the @code{run} command while you have an attached
1735 process, you kill that process. By default, you will be asked for
1736 confirmation if you try to do either of these things; you can control
1737 whether or not you need to confirm by using the @code{set confirm} command
1738 (@pxref{Messages/Warnings, ,Optional warnings and messages}).
1739
1740 @node Kill Process
1741 @c @group
1742 @section Killing the child process
1743
1744 @table @code
1745 @item kill
1746 @kindex kill
1747 Kill the child process in which your program is running under @value{GDBN}.
1748 @end table
1749
1750 This command is useful if you wish to debug a core dump instead of a
1751 running process. @value{GDBN} ignores any core dump file while your program
1752 is running.
1753 @c @end group
1754
1755 On some operating systems, a program cannot be executed outside @value{GDBN}
1756 while you have breakpoints set on it inside @value{GDBN}. You can use the
1757 @code{kill} command in this situation to permit running your program
1758 outside the debugger.
1759
1760 The @code{kill} command is also useful if you wish to recompile and
1761 relink your program, since on many systems it is impossible to modify an
1762 executable file while it is running in a process. In this case, when you
1763 next type @code{run}, @value{GDBN} will notice that the file has changed, and
1764 will re-read the symbol table (while trying to preserve your current
1765 breakpoint settings).
1766
1767 @node Process Information
1768 @section Additional process information
1769
1770 @kindex /proc
1771 @cindex process image
1772 Some operating systems provide a facility called @samp{/proc} that can
1773 be used to examine the image of a running process using file-system
1774 subroutines. If @value{GDBN} is configured for an operating system with this
1775 facility, the command @code{info proc} is available to report on several
1776 kinds of information about the process running your program.
1777
1778 @table @code
1779 @item info proc
1780 @kindex info proc
1781 Summarize available information about the process.
1782
1783 @item info proc mappings
1784 @kindex info proc mappings
1785 Report on the address ranges accessible in the program, with information
1786 on whether your program may read, write, or execute each range.
1787
1788 @item info proc times
1789 @kindex info proc times
1790 Starting time, user CPU time, and system CPU time for your program and
1791 its children.
1792
1793 @item info proc id
1794 @kindex info proc id
1795 Report on the process IDs related to your program: its own process ID,
1796 the ID of its parent, the process group ID, and the session ID.
1797
1798 @item info proc status
1799 @kindex info proc status
1800 General information on the state of the process. If the process is
1801 stopped, this report includes the reason for stopping, and any signal
1802 received.
1803
1804 @item info proc all
1805 Show all the above information about the process.
1806 @end table
1807 @end ifclear
1808
1809 @node Stopping
1810 @chapter Stopping and Continuing
1811
1812 The principal purposes of using a debugger are so that you can stop your
1813 program before it terminates; or so that, if your program runs into
1814 trouble, you can investigate and find out why.
1815
1816 Inside @value{GDBN}, your program may stop for any of several reasons, such
1817 as
1818 @ifclear BARETARGET
1819 a signal,
1820 @end ifclear
1821 a breakpoint, or reaching a new line after a @value{GDBN}
1822 command such as @code{step}. You may then examine and change
1823 variables, set new breakpoints or remove old ones, and then continue
1824 execution. Usually, the messages shown by @value{GDBN} provide ample
1825 explanation of the status of your program---but you can also explicitly
1826 request this information at any time.
1827
1828 @table @code
1829 @item info program
1830 @kindex info program
1831 Display information about the status of your program: whether it is
1832 running or not,
1833 @ifclear BARETARGET
1834 what process it is,
1835 @end ifclear
1836 and why it stopped.
1837 @end table
1838
1839 @menu
1840 @ifclear CONLY
1841 * Breakpoints:: Breakpoints, watchpoints, and exceptions
1842 @end ifclear
1843 @ifset CONLY
1844 * Breakpoints:: Breakpoints and watchpoints
1845 @end ifset
1846 @c Remnant makeinfo bug requires blank line after *successful* end-if in menu:
1847
1848 * Continuing and Stepping:: Resuming execution
1849 @ifset POSIX
1850 * Signals:: Signals
1851 @end ifset
1852 @end menu
1853
1854 @c makeinfo node-defaulting requires adjacency of @node and sectioning cmds
1855 @c ...hence distribute @node Breakpoints over two possible @if expansions.
1856 @c
1857 @ifclear CONLY
1858 @node Breakpoints
1859 @section Breakpoints, watchpoints, and exceptions
1860 @end ifclear
1861 @ifset CONLY
1862 @node Breakpoints
1863 @section Breakpoints and watchpoints
1864 @end ifset
1865
1866 @cindex breakpoints
1867 A @dfn{breakpoint} makes your program stop whenever a certain point in
1868 the program is reached. For each breakpoint, you can add various
1869 conditions to control in finer detail whether your program will stop.
1870 You can set breakpoints with the @code{break} command and its variants
1871 (@pxref{Set Breaks, ,Setting breakpoints}), to specify the place where
1872 your program should stop by line number, function name or exact address
1873 in the program.
1874 @ifclear CONLY
1875 In languages with exception handling (such as GNU C++), you can also set
1876 breakpoints where an exception is raised (@pxref{Exception Handling,
1877 ,Breakpoints and exceptions}).
1878 @end ifclear
1879
1880 @cindex watchpoints
1881 @cindex memory tracing
1882 @cindex breakpoint on memory address
1883 @cindex breakpoint on variable modification
1884 A @dfn{watchpoint} is a special breakpoint that stops your program
1885 when the value of an expression changes. You must use a different
1886 command to set watchpoints (@pxref{Set Watchpoints, ,Setting
1887 watchpoints}), but aside from that, you can manage a watchpoint like
1888 any other breakpoint: you enable, disable, and delete both breakpoints
1889 and watchpoints using the same commands.
1890
1891 You can arrange to have values from your program displayed automatically
1892 whenever @value{GDBN} stops at a breakpoint. @xref{Auto Display,
1893 ,Automatic display}.
1894
1895 @cindex breakpoint numbers
1896 @cindex numbers for breakpoints
1897 @value{GDBN} assigns a number to each breakpoint or watchpoint when you
1898 create it; these numbers are successive integers starting with one. In
1899 many of the commands for controlling various features of breakpoints you
1900 use the breakpoint number to say which breakpoint you want to change.
1901 Each breakpoint may be @dfn{enabled} or @dfn{disabled}; if disabled, it has
1902 no effect on your program until you enable it again.
1903
1904 @menu
1905 * Set Breaks:: Setting breakpoints
1906 * Set Watchpoints:: Setting watchpoints
1907 @ifclear CONLY
1908 * Exception Handling:: Breakpoints and exceptions
1909 @end ifclear
1910
1911 * Delete Breaks:: Deleting breakpoints
1912 * Disabling:: Disabling breakpoints
1913 * Conditions:: Break conditions
1914 * Break Commands:: Breakpoint command lists
1915 @ifclear CONLY
1916 * Breakpoint Menus:: Breakpoint menus
1917 @end ifclear
1918 @ifclear BARETARGET
1919 * Error in Breakpoints:: ``Cannot insert breakpoints''
1920 @end ifclear
1921 @end menu
1922
1923 @node Set Breaks
1924 @subsection Setting breakpoints
1925
1926 @c FIXME LMB what does GDB do if no code on line of breakpt?
1927 @c consider in particular declaration with/without initialization.
1928 @c
1929 @c FIXME 2 is there stuff on this already? break at fun start, already init?
1930
1931 @kindex break
1932 @kindex b
1933 @kindex $bpnum
1934 @cindex latest breakpoint
1935 Breakpoints are set with the @code{break} command (abbreviated
1936 @code{b}). The debugger convenience variable @samp{$bpnum} records the
1937 number of the beakpoint you've set most recently; see @ref{Convenience
1938 Vars,, Convenience variables}, for a discussion of what you can do with
1939 convenience variables.
1940
1941 You have several ways to say where the breakpoint should go.
1942
1943 @table @code
1944 @item break @var{function}
1945 Set a breakpoint at entry to function @var{function}.
1946 @ifclear CONLY
1947 When using source languages that permit overloading of symbols, such as
1948 C++, @var{function} may refer to more than one possible place to break.
1949 @xref{Breakpoint Menus,,Breakpoint menus}, for a discussion of that situation.
1950 @end ifclear
1951
1952 @item break +@var{offset}
1953 @itemx break -@var{offset}
1954 Set a breakpoint some number of lines forward or back from the position
1955 at which execution stopped in the currently selected frame.
1956
1957 @item break @var{linenum}
1958 Set a breakpoint at line @var{linenum} in the current source file.
1959 That file is the last file whose source text was printed. This
1960 breakpoint will stop your program just before it executes any of the
1961 code on that line.
1962
1963 @item break @var{filename}:@var{linenum}
1964 Set a breakpoint at line @var{linenum} in source file @var{filename}.
1965
1966 @item break @var{filename}:@var{function}
1967 Set a breakpoint at entry to function @var{function} found in file
1968 @var{filename}. Specifying a file name as well as a function name is
1969 superfluous except when multiple files contain similarly named
1970 functions.
1971
1972 @item break *@var{address}
1973 Set a breakpoint at address @var{address}. You can use this to set
1974 breakpoints in parts of your program which do not have debugging
1975 information or source files.
1976
1977 @item break
1978 When called without any arguments, @code{break} sets a breakpoint at
1979 the next instruction to be executed in the selected stack frame
1980 (@pxref{Stack, ,Examining the Stack}). In any selected frame but the
1981 innermost, this will cause your program to stop as soon as control
1982 returns to that frame. This is similar to the effect of a
1983 @code{finish} command in the frame inside the selected frame---except
1984 that @code{finish} does not leave an active breakpoint. If you use
1985 @code{break} without an argument in the innermost frame, @value{GDBN} will stop
1986 the next time it reaches the current location; this may be useful
1987 inside loops.
1988
1989 @value{GDBN} normally ignores breakpoints when it resumes execution, until at
1990 least one instruction has been executed. If it did not do this, you
1991 would be unable to proceed past a breakpoint without first disabling the
1992 breakpoint. This rule applies whether or not the breakpoint already
1993 existed when your program stopped.
1994
1995 @item break @dots{} if @var{cond}
1996 Set a breakpoint with condition @var{cond}; evaluate the expression
1997 @var{cond} each time the breakpoint is reached, and stop only if the
1998 value is nonzero---that is, if @var{cond} evaluates as true.
1999 @samp{@dots{}} stands for one of the possible arguments described
2000 above (or no argument) specifying where to break. @xref{Conditions,
2001 ,Break conditions}, for more information on breakpoint conditions.
2002
2003 @item tbreak @var{args}
2004 @kindex tbreak
2005 Set a breakpoint enabled only for one stop. @var{args} are the
2006 same as for the @code{break} command, and the breakpoint is set in the same
2007 way, but the breakpoint is automatically disabled after the first time your
2008 program stops there. @xref{Disabling, ,Disabling breakpoints}.
2009
2010 @item rbreak @var{regex}
2011 @kindex rbreak
2012 @cindex regular expression
2013 @c FIXME what kind of regexp?
2014 Set breakpoints on all functions matching the regular expression
2015 @var{regex}. This command
2016 sets an unconditional breakpoint on all matches, printing a list of all
2017 breakpoints it set. Once these breakpoints are set, they are treated
2018 just like the breakpoints set with the @code{break} command. They can
2019 be deleted, disabled, made conditional, etc., in the standard ways.
2020
2021 @ifclear CONLY
2022 When debugging C++ programs, @code{rbreak} is useful for setting
2023 breakpoints on overloaded functions that are not members of any special
2024 classes.
2025 @end ifclear
2026
2027 @kindex info breakpoints
2028 @cindex @code{$_} and @code{info breakpoints}
2029 @item info breakpoints @r{[}@var{n}@r{]}
2030 @itemx info break @r{[}@var{n}@r{]}
2031 @itemx info watchpoints @r{[}@var{n}@r{]}
2032 Print a table of all breakpoints and watchpoints set and not
2033 deleted, with the following columns for each breakpoint:
2034
2035 @table @emph
2036 @item Breakpoint Numbers
2037 @item Type
2038 Breakpoint or watchpoint.
2039 @item Disposition
2040 Whether the breakpoint is marked to be disabled or deleted when hit.
2041 @item Enabled or Disabled
2042 Enabled breakpoints are marked with @samp{y}. @samp{n} marks breakpoints
2043 that are not enabled.
2044 @item Address
2045 Where the breakpoint is in your program, as a memory address
2046 @item What
2047 Where the breakpoint is in the source for your program, as a file and
2048 line number.
2049 @end table
2050
2051 @noindent
2052 If a breakpoint is conditional, @code{info break} shows the condition on
2053 the line following the affected breakpoint; breakpoint commands, if any,
2054 are listed after that.
2055
2056 @noindent
2057 @code{info break} with a breakpoint
2058 number @var{n} as argument lists only that breakpoint. The
2059 convenience variable @code{$_} and the default examining-address for
2060 the @code{x} command are set to the address of the last breakpoint
2061 listed (@pxref{Memory, ,Examining memory}).
2062 @end table
2063
2064 @value{GDBN} allows you to set any number of breakpoints at the same place in
2065 your program. There is nothing silly or meaningless about this. When
2066 the breakpoints are conditional, this is even useful
2067 (@pxref{Conditions, ,Break conditions}).
2068
2069 @cindex negative breakpoint numbers
2070 @cindex internal @value{GDBN} breakpoints
2071 @value{GDBN} itself sometimes sets breakpoints in your program for special
2072 purposes, such as proper handling of @code{longjmp} (in C programs).
2073 These internal breakpoints are assigned negative numbers, starting with
2074 @code{-1}; @samp{info breakpoints} does not display them.
2075
2076 You can see these breakpoints with the @value{GDBN} maintenance command
2077 @samp{maint info breakpoints}.
2078
2079 @table @code
2080 @kindex maint info breakpoints
2081 @item maint info breakpoints
2082 Using the same format as @samp{info breakpoints}, display both the
2083 breakpoints you've set explicitly, and those @value{GDBN} is using for
2084 internal purposes. Internal breakpoints are shown with negative
2085 breakpoint numbers. The type column identifies what kind of breakpoint
2086 is shown:
2087
2088 @table @code
2089 @item breakpoint
2090 Normal, explicitly set breakpoint.
2091
2092 @item watchpoint
2093 Normal, explicitly set watchpoint.
2094
2095 @item longjmp
2096 Internal breakpoint, used to handle correctly stepping through
2097 @code{longjmp} calls.
2098
2099 @item longjmp resume
2100 Internal breakpoint at the target of a @code{longjmp}.
2101
2102 @item until
2103 Temporary internal breakpoint used by the @value{GDBN} @code{until} command.
2104
2105 @item finish
2106 Temporary internal breakpoint used by the @value{GDBN} @code{finish} command.
2107 @end table
2108
2109 @end table
2110
2111
2112 @node Set Watchpoints
2113 @subsection Setting watchpoints
2114 @cindex setting watchpoints
2115
2116 You can use a watchpoint to stop execution whenever the value of an
2117 expression changes, without having to predict a particular place
2118 where this may happen.
2119
2120 Watchpoints currently execute two orders of magnitude more slowly than
2121 other breakpoints, but this can be well worth it to catch errors where
2122 you have no clue what part of your program is the culprit. Some
2123 processors provide special hardware to support watchpoint evaluation; future
2124 releases of @value{GDBN} will use such hardware if it is available.
2125
2126 @table @code
2127 @kindex watch
2128 @item watch @var{expr}
2129 Set a watchpoint for an expression.
2130
2131 @kindex info watchpoints
2132 @item info watchpoints
2133 This command prints a list of watchpoints and breakpoints; it is the
2134 same as @code{info break}.
2135 @end table
2136
2137 @ifclear CONLY
2138 @node Exception Handling
2139 @subsection Breakpoints and exceptions
2140 @cindex exception handlers
2141
2142 Some languages, such as GNU C++, implement exception handling. You can
2143 use @value{GDBN} to examine what caused your program to raise an exception,
2144 and to list the exceptions your program is prepared to handle at a
2145 given point in time.
2146
2147 @table @code
2148 @item catch @var{exceptions}
2149 @kindex catch
2150 You can set breakpoints at active exception handlers by using the
2151 @code{catch} command. @var{exceptions} is a list of names of exceptions
2152 to catch.
2153 @end table
2154
2155 You can use @code{info catch} to list active exception handlers.
2156 @xref{Frame Info, ,Information about a frame}.
2157
2158 There are currently some limitations to exception handling in @value{GDBN}.
2159 These will be corrected in a future release.
2160
2161 @itemize @bullet
2162 @item
2163 If you call a function interactively, @value{GDBN} normally returns
2164 control to you when the function has finished executing. If the call
2165 raises an exception, however, the call may bypass the mechanism that
2166 returns control to you and cause your program to simply continue
2167 running until it hits a breakpoint, catches a signal that @value{GDBN} is
2168 listening for, or exits.
2169 @item
2170 You cannot raise an exception interactively.
2171 @item
2172 You cannot interactively install an exception handler.
2173 @end itemize
2174
2175 @cindex raise exceptions
2176 Sometimes @code{catch} is not the best way to debug exception handling:
2177 if you need to know exactly where an exception is raised, it is better to
2178 stop @emph{before} the exception handler is called, since that way you
2179 can see the stack before any unwinding takes place. If you set a
2180 breakpoint in an exception handler instead, it may not be easy to find
2181 out where the exception was raised.
2182
2183 To stop just before an exception handler is called, you need some
2184 knowledge of the implementation. In the case of GNU C++, exceptions are
2185 raised by calling a library function named @code{__raise_exception}
2186 which has the following ANSI C interface:
2187
2188 @example
2189 /* @var{addr} is where the exception identifier is stored.
2190 ID is the exception identifier. */
2191 void __raise_exception (void **@var{addr}, void *@var{id});
2192 @end example
2193
2194 @noindent
2195 To make the debugger catch all exceptions before any stack
2196 unwinding takes place, set a breakpoint on @code{__raise_exception}
2197 (@pxref{Breakpoints, ,Breakpoints; watchpoints; and exceptions}).
2198
2199 With a conditional breakpoint (@pxref{Conditions, ,Break conditions})
2200 that depends on the value of @var{id}, you can stop your program when
2201 a specific exception is raised. You can use multiple conditional
2202 breakpoints to stop your program when any of a number of exceptions are
2203 raised.
2204 @end ifclear
2205
2206 @node Delete Breaks
2207 @subsection Deleting breakpoints
2208
2209 @cindex clearing breakpoints, watchpoints
2210 @cindex deleting breakpoints, watchpoints
2211 It is often necessary to eliminate a breakpoint or watchpoint once it
2212 has done its job and you no longer want your program to stop there. This
2213 is called @dfn{deleting} the breakpoint. A breakpoint that has been
2214 deleted no longer exists; it is forgotten.
2215
2216 With the @code{clear} command you can delete breakpoints according to
2217 where they are in your program. With the @code{delete} command you can
2218 delete individual breakpoints or watchpoints by specifying their
2219 breakpoint numbers.
2220
2221 It is not necessary to delete a breakpoint to proceed past it. @value{GDBN}
2222 automatically ignores breakpoints on the first instruction to be executed
2223 when you continue execution without changing the execution address.
2224
2225 @table @code
2226 @item clear
2227 @kindex clear
2228 Delete any breakpoints at the next instruction to be executed in the
2229 selected stack frame (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a frame}). When
2230 the innermost frame is selected, this is a good way to delete a
2231 breakpoint where your program just stopped.
2232
2233 @item clear @var{function}
2234 @itemx clear @var{filename}:@var{function}
2235 Delete any breakpoints set at entry to the function @var{function}.
2236
2237 @item clear @var{linenum}
2238 @itemx clear @var{filename}:@var{linenum}
2239 Delete any breakpoints set at or within the code of the specified line.
2240
2241 @item delete @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} @r{[}@var{bnums}@dots{}@r{]}
2242 @cindex delete breakpoints
2243 @kindex delete
2244 @kindex d
2245 Delete the breakpoints or watchpoints of the numbers specified as
2246 arguments. If no argument is specified, delete all breakpoints (@value{GDBN}
2247 asks confirmation, unless you have @code{set confirm off}). You
2248 can abbreviate this command as @code{d}.
2249 @end table
2250
2251 @node Disabling
2252 @subsection Disabling breakpoints
2253
2254 @cindex disabled breakpoints
2255 @cindex enabled breakpoints
2256 Rather than deleting a breakpoint or watchpoint, you might prefer to
2257 @dfn{disable} it. This makes the breakpoint inoperative as if it had
2258 been deleted, but remembers the information on the breakpoint so that
2259 you can @dfn{enable} it again later.
2260
2261 You disable and enable breakpoints and watchpoints with the
2262 @code{enable} and @code{disable} commands, optionally specifying one or
2263 more breakpoint numbers as arguments. Use @code{info break} or
2264 @code{info watch} to print a list of breakpoints or watchpoints if you
2265 do not know which numbers to use.
2266
2267 A breakpoint or watchpoint can have any of four different states of
2268 enablement:
2269
2270 @itemize @bullet
2271 @item
2272 Enabled. The breakpoint will stop your program. A breakpoint set
2273 with the @code{break} command starts out in this state.
2274 @item
2275 Disabled. The breakpoint has no effect on your program.
2276 @item
2277 Enabled once. The breakpoint will stop your program, but
2278 when it does so it will become disabled. A breakpoint set
2279 with the @code{tbreak} command starts out in this state.
2280 @item
2281 Enabled for deletion. The breakpoint will stop your program, but
2282 immediately after it does so it will be deleted permanently.
2283 @end itemize
2284
2285 You can use the following commands to enable or disable breakpoints and
2286 watchpoints:
2287
2288 @table @code
2289 @item disable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} @r{[}@var{bnums}@dots{}@r{]}
2290 @kindex disable breakpoints
2291 @kindex disable
2292 @kindex dis
2293 Disable the specified breakpoints---or all breakpoints, if none are
2294 listed. A disabled breakpoint has no effect but is not forgotten. All
2295 options such as ignore-counts, conditions and commands are remembered in
2296 case the breakpoint is enabled again later. You may abbreviate
2297 @code{disable} as @code{dis}.
2298
2299 @item enable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} @r{[}@var{bnums}@dots{}@r{]}
2300 @kindex enable breakpoints
2301 @kindex enable
2302 Enable the specified breakpoints (or all defined breakpoints). They
2303 become effective once again in stopping your program.
2304
2305 @item enable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} once @var{bnums}@dots{}
2306 Enable the specified breakpoints temporarily. Each will be disabled
2307 again the next time it stops your program.
2308
2309 @item enable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} delete @var{bnums}@dots{}
2310 Enable the specified breakpoints to work once and then die. Each of
2311 the breakpoints will be deleted the next time it stops your program.
2312 @end table
2313
2314 Save for a breakpoint set with @code{tbreak} (@pxref{Set Breaks,
2315 ,Setting breakpoints}), breakpoints that you set are initially enabled;
2316 subsequently, they become disabled or enabled only when you use one of
2317 the commands above. (The command @code{until} can set and delete a
2318 breakpoint of its own, but it will not change the state of your other
2319 breakpoints; see @ref{Continuing and Stepping, ,Continuing and
2320 stepping}.)
2321
2322 @node Conditions
2323 @subsection Break conditions
2324 @cindex conditional breakpoints
2325 @cindex breakpoint conditions
2326
2327 @c FIXME what is scope of break condition expr? Context where wanted?
2328 @c in particular for a watchpoint?
2329 The simplest sort of breakpoint breaks every time your program reaches a
2330 specified place. You can also specify a @dfn{condition} for a
2331 breakpoint. A condition is just a Boolean expression in your
2332 programming language (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}). A breakpoint with
2333 a condition evaluates the expression each time your program reaches it,
2334 and your program stops only if the condition is @emph{true}.
2335
2336 This is the converse of using assertions for program validation; in that
2337 situation, you want to stop when the assertion is violated---that is,
2338 when the condition is false. In C, if you want to test an assertion expressed
2339 by the condition @var{assert}, you should set the condition
2340 @samp{! @var{assert}} on the appropriate breakpoint.
2341
2342 Conditions are also accepted for watchpoints; you may not need them,
2343 since a watchpoint is inspecting the value of an expression anyhow---but
2344 it might be simpler, say, to just set a watchpoint on a variable name,
2345 and specify a condition that tests whether the new value is an interesting
2346 one.
2347
2348 Break conditions can have side effects, and may even call functions in
2349 your program. This can be useful, for example, to activate functions
2350 that log program progress, or to use your own print functions to
2351 format special data structures. The effects are completely predictable
2352 unless there is another enabled breakpoint at the same address. (In
2353 that case, @value{GDBN} might see the other breakpoint first and stop your
2354 program without checking the condition of this one.) Note that
2355 breakpoint commands are usually more convenient and flexible for the
2356 purpose of performing side effects when a breakpoint is reached
2357 (@pxref{Break Commands, ,Breakpoint command lists}).
2358
2359 Break conditions can be specified when a breakpoint is set, by using
2360 @samp{if} in the arguments to the @code{break} command. @xref{Set
2361 Breaks, ,Setting breakpoints}. They can also be changed at any time
2362 with the @code{condition} command. The @code{watch} command does not
2363 recognize the @code{if} keyword; @code{condition} is the only way to
2364 impose a further condition on a watchpoint.
2365
2366 @table @code
2367 @item condition @var{bnum} @var{expression}
2368 @kindex condition
2369 Specify @var{expression} as the break condition for breakpoint or
2370 watchpoint number @var{bnum}. From now on, this breakpoint will stop
2371 your program only if the value of @var{expression} is true (nonzero, in
2372 C). When you use @code{condition}, @value{GDBN} checks @var{expression}
2373 immediately for syntactic correctness, and to determine whether symbols
2374 in it have referents in the context of your breakpoint.
2375 @c FIXME so what does GDB do if there is no referent? Moreover, what
2376 @c about watchpoints?
2377 @value{GDBN} does
2378 not actually evaluate @var{expression} at the time the @code{condition}
2379 command is given, however. @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}.
2380
2381 @item condition @var{bnum}
2382 Remove the condition from breakpoint number @var{bnum}. It becomes
2383 an ordinary unconditional breakpoint.
2384 @end table
2385
2386 @cindex ignore count (of breakpoint)
2387 A special case of a breakpoint condition is to stop only when the
2388 breakpoint has been reached a certain number of times. This is so
2389 useful that there is a special way to do it, using the @dfn{ignore
2390 count} of the breakpoint. Every breakpoint has an ignore count, which
2391 is an integer. Most of the time, the ignore count is zero, and
2392 therefore has no effect. But if your program reaches a breakpoint whose
2393 ignore count is positive, then instead of stopping, it just decrements
2394 the ignore count by one and continues. As a result, if the ignore count
2395 value is @var{n}, the breakpoint will not stop the next @var{n} times it
2396 is reached.
2397
2398 @table @code
2399 @item ignore @var{bnum} @var{count}
2400 @kindex ignore
2401 Set the ignore count of breakpoint number @var{bnum} to @var{count}.
2402 The next @var{count} times the breakpoint is reached, your program's
2403 execution will not stop; other than to decrement the ignore count, @value{GDBN}
2404 takes no action.
2405
2406 To make the breakpoint stop the next time it is reached, specify
2407 a count of zero.
2408
2409 When you use @code{continue} to resume execution of your program from a
2410 breakpoint, you can specify an ignore count directly as an argument to
2411 @code{continue}, rather than using @code{ignore}. @xref{Continuing and
2412 Stepping,,Continuing and stepping}.
2413
2414 If a breakpoint has a positive ignore count and a condition, the condition
2415 is not checked. Once the ignore count reaches zero, the condition will
2416 be checked.
2417
2418 You could achieve the effect of the ignore count with a condition such
2419 as @w{@samp{$foo-- <= 0}} using a debugger convenience variable that
2420 is decremented each time. @xref{Convenience Vars, ,Convenience
2421 variables}.
2422 @end table
2423
2424 @node Break Commands
2425 @subsection Breakpoint command lists
2426
2427 @cindex breakpoint commands
2428 You can give any breakpoint (or watchpoint) a series of commands to
2429 execute when your program stops due to that breakpoint. For example, you
2430 might want to print the values of certain expressions, or enable other
2431 breakpoints.
2432
2433 @table @code
2434 @item commands @r{[}@var{bnum}@r{]}
2435 @itemx @dots{} @var{command-list} @dots{}
2436 @itemx end
2437 @kindex commands
2438 @kindex end
2439 Specify a list of commands for breakpoint number @var{bnum}. The commands
2440 themselves appear on the following lines. Type a line containing just
2441 @code{end} to terminate the commands.
2442
2443 To remove all commands from a breakpoint, type @code{commands} and
2444 follow it immediately with @code{end}; that is, give no commands.
2445
2446 With no @var{bnum} argument, @code{commands} refers to the last
2447 breakpoint or watchpoint set (not to the breakpoint most recently
2448 encountered).
2449 @end table
2450
2451 Pressing @key{RET} as a means of repeating the last @value{GDBN} command is
2452 disabled within a @var{command-list}.
2453
2454 You can use breakpoint commands to start your program up again. Simply
2455 use the @code{continue} command, or @code{step}, or any other command
2456 that resumes execution.
2457
2458 Any other commands in the command list, after a command that resumes
2459 execution, are ignored. This is because any time you resume execution
2460 (even with a simple @code{next} or @code{step}), you may encounter
2461 another breakpoint---which could have its own command list, leading to
2462 ambiguities about which list to execute.
2463
2464 @kindex silent
2465 If the first command you specify in a command list is @code{silent}, the
2466 usual message about stopping at a breakpoint is not printed. This may
2467 be desirable for breakpoints that are to print a specific message and
2468 then continue. If none of the remaining commands print anything, you
2469 will see no sign that the breakpoint was reached. @code{silent} is
2470 meaningful only at the beginning of a breakpoint command list.
2471
2472 The commands @code{echo}, @code{output}, and @code{printf} allow you to
2473 print precisely controlled output, and are often useful in silent
2474 breakpoints. @xref{Output, ,Commands for controlled output}.
2475
2476 For example, here is how you could use breakpoint commands to print the
2477 value of @code{x} at entry to @code{foo} whenever @code{x} is positive.
2478
2479 @example
2480 break foo if x>0
2481 commands
2482 silent
2483 printf "x is %d\n",x
2484 cont
2485 end
2486 @end example
2487
2488 One application for breakpoint commands is to compensate for one bug so
2489 you can test for another. Put a breakpoint just after the erroneous line
2490 of code, give it a condition to detect the case in which something
2491 erroneous has been done, and give it commands to assign correct values
2492 to any variables that need them. End with the @code{continue} command
2493 so that your program does not stop, and start with the @code{silent}
2494 command so that no output is produced. Here is an example:
2495
2496 @example
2497 break 403
2498 commands
2499 silent
2500 set x = y + 4
2501 cont
2502 end
2503 @end example
2504
2505 @ifclear CONLY
2506 @node Breakpoint Menus
2507 @subsection Breakpoint menus
2508 @cindex overloading
2509 @cindex symbol overloading
2510
2511 Some programming languages (notably C++) permit a single function name
2512 to be defined several times, for application in different contexts.
2513 This is called @dfn{overloading}. When a function name is overloaded,
2514 @samp{break @var{function}} is not enough to tell @value{GDBN} where you want
2515 a breakpoint. If you realize this will be a problem, you can use
2516 something like @samp{break @var{function}(@var{types})} to specify which
2517 particular version of the function you want. Otherwise, @value{GDBN} offers
2518 you a menu of numbered choices for different possible breakpoints, and
2519 waits for your selection with the prompt @samp{>}. The first two
2520 options are always @samp{[0] cancel} and @samp{[1] all}. Typing @kbd{1}
2521 sets a breakpoint at each definition of @var{function}, and typing
2522 @kbd{0} aborts the @code{break} command without setting any new
2523 breakpoints.
2524
2525 For example, the following session excerpt shows an attempt to set a
2526 breakpoint at the overloaded symbol @code{String::after}.
2527 We choose three particular definitions of that function name:
2528
2529 @c FIXME! This is likely to change to show arg type lists, at least
2530 @smallexample
2531 (@value{GDBP}) b String::after
2532 [0] cancel
2533 [1] all
2534 [2] file:String.cc; line number:867
2535 [3] file:String.cc; line number:860
2536 [4] file:String.cc; line number:875
2537 [5] file:String.cc; line number:853
2538 [6] file:String.cc; line number:846
2539 [7] file:String.cc; line number:735
2540 > 2 4 6
2541 Breakpoint 1 at 0xb26c: file String.cc, line 867.
2542 Breakpoint 2 at 0xb344: file String.cc, line 875.
2543 Breakpoint 3 at 0xafcc: file String.cc, line 846.
2544 Multiple breakpoints were set.
2545 Use the "delete" command to delete unwanted
2546 breakpoints.
2547 (@value{GDBP})
2548 @end smallexample
2549 @end ifclear
2550
2551 @ifclear BARETARGET
2552 @node Error in Breakpoints
2553 @subsection ``Cannot insert breakpoints''
2554
2555 @c FIXME: "cannot insert breakpoints" error, v unclear.
2556 @c Q in pending mail to Gilmore. ---pesch@cygnus.com, 26mar91
2557 @c some light may be shed by looking at instances of
2558 @c ONE_PROCESS_WRITETEXT. But error message seems possible otherwise
2559 @c too. pesch, 20sep91
2560 Under some operating systems, breakpoints cannot be used in a program if
2561 any other process is running that program. In this situation,
2562 attempting to run or continue a program with a breakpoint causes @value{GDBN}
2563 to stop the other process.
2564
2565 When this happens, you have three ways to proceed:
2566
2567 @enumerate
2568 @item
2569 Remove or disable the breakpoints, then continue.
2570
2571 @item
2572 Suspend @value{GDBN}, and copy the file containing your program to a new name.
2573 Resume @value{GDBN} and use the @code{exec-file} command to specify that @value{GDBN}
2574 should run your program under that name. Then start your program again.
2575
2576 @c FIXME: RMS commented here "Show example". Maybe when someone
2577 @c explains the first FIXME: in this section...
2578
2579 @item
2580 Relink your program so that the text segment is nonsharable, using the
2581 linker option @samp{-N}. The operating system limitation may not apply
2582 to nonsharable executables.
2583 @end enumerate
2584 @end ifclear
2585
2586 @node Continuing and Stepping
2587 @section Continuing and stepping
2588
2589 @cindex stepping
2590 @cindex continuing
2591 @cindex resuming execution
2592 @dfn{Continuing} means resuming program execution until your program
2593 completes normally. In contrast, @dfn{stepping} means executing just
2594 one more ``step'' of your program, where ``step'' may mean either one
2595 line of source code, or one machine instruction (depending on what
2596 particular command you use). Either when continuing
2597 or when stepping, your program may stop even sooner, due to
2598 @ifset BARETARGET
2599 a breakpoint.
2600 @end ifset
2601 @ifclear BARETARGET
2602 a breakpoint or a signal. (If due to a signal, you may want to use
2603 @code{handle}, or use @samp{signal 0} to resume execution.
2604 @xref{Signals, ,Signals}.)
2605 @end ifclear
2606
2607 @table @code
2608 @item continue @r{[}@var{ignore-count}@r{]}
2609 @itemx c @r{[}@var{ignore-count}@r{]}
2610 @itemx fg @r{[}@var{ignore-count}@r{]}
2611 @kindex continue
2612 @kindex c
2613 @kindex fg
2614 Resume program execution, at the address where your program last stopped;
2615 any breakpoints set at that address are bypassed. The optional argument
2616 @var{ignore-count} allows you to specify a further number of times to
2617 ignore a breakpoint at this location; its effect is like that of
2618 @code{ignore} (@pxref{Conditions, ,Break conditions}).
2619
2620 The argument @var{ignore-count} is meaningful only when your program
2621 stopped due to a breakpoint. At other times, the argument to
2622 @code{continue} is ignored.
2623
2624 The synonyms @code{c} and @code{fg} are provided purely for convenience,
2625 and have exactly the same behavior as @code{continue}.
2626 @end table
2627
2628 To resume execution at a different place, you can use @code{return}
2629 (@pxref{Returning, ,Returning from a function}) to go back to the
2630 calling function; or @code{jump} (@pxref{Jumping, ,Continuing at a
2631 different address}) to go to an arbitrary location in your program.
2632
2633 A typical technique for using stepping is to set a breakpoint
2634 @ifclear CONLY
2635 (@pxref{Breakpoints, ,Breakpoints; watchpoints; and exceptions})
2636 @end ifclear
2637 @ifset CONLY
2638 (@pxref{Breakpoints, ,Breakpoints and watchpoints})
2639 @end ifset
2640 at the
2641 beginning of the function or the section of your program where a
2642 problem is believed to lie, run your program until it stops at that
2643 breakpoint, and then step through the suspect area, examining the
2644 variables that are interesting, until you see the problem happen.
2645
2646 @table @code
2647 @item step
2648 @kindex step
2649 @kindex s
2650 Continue running your program until control reaches a different source
2651 line, then stop it and return control to @value{GDBN}. This command is
2652 abbreviated @code{s}.
2653
2654 @quotation
2655 @emph{Warning:} If you use the @code{step} command while control is
2656 within a function that was compiled without debugging information,
2657 execution proceeds until control reaches a function that does have
2658 debugging information.
2659 @end quotation
2660
2661 @item step @var{count}
2662 Continue running as in @code{step}, but do so @var{count} times. If a
2663 breakpoint is reached,
2664 @ifclear BARETARGET
2665 or a signal not related to stepping occurs before @var{count} steps,
2666 @end ifclear
2667 stepping stops right away.
2668
2669 @item next @r{[}@var{count}@r{]}
2670 @kindex next
2671 @kindex n
2672 Continue to the next source line in the current (innermost) stack frame.
2673 Similar to @code{step}, but any function calls appearing within the line
2674 of code are executed without stopping. Execution stops when control
2675 reaches a different line of code at the stack level which was executing
2676 when the @code{next} command was given. This command is abbreviated
2677 @code{n}.
2678
2679 An argument @var{count} is a repeat count, as for @code{step}.
2680
2681 @code{next} within a function that lacks debugging information acts like
2682 @code{step}, but any function calls appearing within the code of the
2683 function are executed without stopping.
2684
2685 @item finish
2686 @kindex finish
2687 Continue running until just after function in the selected stack frame
2688 returns. Print the returned value (if any).
2689
2690 Contrast this with the @code{return} command (@pxref{Returning,
2691 ,Returning from a function}).
2692
2693 @item until
2694 @kindex until
2695 @itemx u
2696 @kindex u
2697 Continue running until a source line past the current line, in the
2698 current stack frame, is reached. This command is used to avoid single
2699 stepping through a loop more than once. It is like the @code{next}
2700 command, except that when @code{until} encounters a jump, it
2701 automatically continues execution until the program counter is greater
2702 than the address of the jump.
2703
2704 This means that when you reach the end of a loop after single stepping
2705 though it, @code{until} will cause your program to continue execution
2706 until the loop is exited. In contrast, a @code{next} command at the end
2707 of a loop will simply step back to the beginning of the loop, which
2708 would force you to step through the next iteration.
2709
2710 @code{until} always stops your program if it attempts to exit the current
2711 stack frame.
2712
2713 @code{until} may produce somewhat counterintuitive results if the order
2714 of machine code does not match the order of the source lines. For
2715 example, in the following excerpt from a debugging session, the @code{f}
2716 (@code{frame}) command shows that execution is stopped at line
2717 @code{206}; yet when we use @code{until}, we get to line @code{195}:
2718
2719 @example
2720 (@value{GDBP}) f
2721 #0 main (argc=4, argv=0xf7fffae8) at m4.c:206
2722 206 expand_input();
2723 (@value{GDBP}) until
2724 195 for ( ; argc > 0; NEXTARG) @{
2725 @end example
2726
2727 This happened because, for execution efficiency, the compiler had
2728 generated code for the loop closure test at the end, rather than the
2729 start, of the loop---even though the test in a C @code{for}-loop is
2730 written before the body of the loop. The @code{until} command appeared
2731 to step back to the beginning of the loop when it advanced to this
2732 expression; however, it has not really gone to an earlier
2733 statement---not in terms of the actual machine code.
2734
2735 @code{until} with no argument works by means of single
2736 instruction stepping, and hence is slower than @code{until} with an
2737 argument.
2738
2739 @item until @var{location}
2740 @itemx u @var{location}
2741 Continue running your program until either the specified location is
2742 reached, or the current stack frame returns. @var{location} is any of
2743 the forms of argument acceptable to @code{break} (@pxref{Set Breaks,
2744 ,Setting breakpoints}). This form of the command uses breakpoints,
2745 and hence is quicker than @code{until} without an argument.
2746
2747 @item stepi
2748 @itemx si
2749 @kindex stepi
2750 @kindex si
2751 Execute one machine instruction, then stop and return to the debugger.
2752
2753 It is often useful to do @samp{display/i $pc} when stepping by machine
2754 instructions. This will cause the next instruction to be executed to
2755 be displayed automatically at each stop. @xref{Auto Display,
2756 ,Automatic display}.
2757
2758 An argument is a repeat count, as in @code{step}.
2759
2760 @need 750
2761 @item nexti
2762 @itemx ni
2763 @kindex nexti
2764 @kindex ni
2765 Execute one machine instruction, but if it is a function call,
2766 proceed until the function returns.
2767
2768 An argument is a repeat count, as in @code{next}.
2769 @end table
2770
2771 @ifset POSIX
2772 @node Signals
2773 @section Signals
2774 @cindex signals
2775
2776 A signal is an asynchronous event that can happen in a program. The
2777 operating system defines the possible kinds of signals, and gives each
2778 kind a name and a number. For example, in Unix @code{SIGINT} is the
2779 signal a program gets when you type an interrupt (often @kbd{C-c});
2780 @code{SIGSEGV} is the signal a program gets from referencing a place in
2781 memory far away from all the areas in use; @code{SIGALRM} occurs when
2782 the alarm clock timer goes off (which happens only if your program has
2783 requested an alarm).
2784
2785 @cindex fatal signals
2786 Some signals, including @code{SIGALRM}, are a normal part of the
2787 functioning of your program. Others, such as @code{SIGSEGV}, indicate
2788 errors; these signals are @dfn{fatal} (kill your program immediately) if the
2789 program has not specified in advance some other way to handle the signal.
2790 @code{SIGINT} does not indicate an error in your program, but it is normally
2791 fatal so it can carry out the purpose of the interrupt: to kill the program.
2792
2793 @value{GDBN} has the ability to detect any occurrence of a signal in your
2794 program. You can tell @value{GDBN} in advance what to do for each kind of
2795 signal.
2796
2797 @cindex handling signals
2798 Normally, @value{GDBN} is set up to ignore non-erroneous signals like @code{SIGALRM}
2799 (so as not to interfere with their role in the functioning of your program)
2800 but to stop your program immediately whenever an error signal happens.
2801 You can change these settings with the @code{handle} command.
2802
2803 @table @code
2804 @item info signals
2805 @kindex info signals
2806 Print a table of all the kinds of signals and how @value{GDBN} has been told to
2807 handle each one. You can use this to see the signal numbers of all
2808 the defined types of signals.
2809
2810 @item handle @var{signal} @var{keywords}@dots{}
2811 @kindex handle
2812 Change the way @value{GDBN} handles signal @var{signal}. @var{signal} can be the
2813 number of a signal or its name (with or without the @samp{SIG} at the
2814 beginning). The @var{keywords} say what change to make.
2815 @end table
2816
2817 @c @group
2818 The keywords allowed by the @code{handle} command can be abbreviated.
2819 Their full names are:
2820
2821 @table @code
2822 @item nostop
2823 @value{GDBN} should not stop your program when this signal happens. It may
2824 still print a message telling you that the signal has come in.
2825
2826 @item stop
2827 @value{GDBN} should stop your program when this signal happens. This implies
2828 the @code{print} keyword as well.
2829
2830 @item print
2831 @value{GDBN} should print a message when this signal happens.
2832
2833 @item noprint
2834 @value{GDBN} should not mention the occurrence of the signal at all. This
2835 implies the @code{nostop} keyword as well.
2836
2837 @item pass
2838 @value{GDBN} should allow your program to see this signal; your program will be
2839 able to handle the signal, or may be terminated if the signal is fatal
2840 and not handled.
2841
2842 @item nopass
2843 @value{GDBN} should not allow your program to see this signal.
2844 @end table
2845 @c @end group
2846
2847 When a signal stops your program, the signal is not visible until you
2848 continue. Your program will see the signal then, if @code{pass} is in
2849 effect for the signal in question @emph{at that time}. In other words,
2850 after @value{GDBN} reports a signal, you can use the @code{handle}
2851 command with @code{pass} or @code{nopass} to control whether that
2852 signal will be seen by your program when you later continue it.
2853
2854 You can also use the @code{signal} command to prevent your program from
2855 seeing a signal, or cause it to see a signal it normally would not see,
2856 or to give it any signal at any time. For example, if your program stopped
2857 due to some sort of memory reference error, you might store correct
2858 values into the erroneous variables and continue, hoping to see more
2859 execution; but your program would probably terminate immediately as
2860 a result of the fatal signal once it saw the signal. To prevent this,
2861 you can continue with @samp{signal 0}. @xref{Signaling, ,Giving your
2862 program a signal}.
2863 @end ifset
2864
2865 @node Stack
2866 @chapter Examining the Stack
2867
2868 When your program has stopped, the first thing you need to know is where it
2869 stopped and how it got there.
2870
2871 @cindex call stack
2872 Each time your program performs a function call, the information about
2873 where in your program the call was made from is saved in a block of data
2874 called a @dfn{stack frame}. The frame also contains the arguments of the
2875 call and the local variables of the function that was called. All the
2876 stack frames are allocated in a region of memory called the @dfn{call
2877 stack}.
2878
2879 When your program stops, the @value{GDBN} commands for examining the
2880 stack allow you to see all of this information.
2881
2882 @cindex selected frame
2883 One of the stack frames is @dfn{selected} by @value{GDBN} and many
2884 @value{GDBN} commands refer implicitly to the selected frame. In
2885 particular, whenever you ask @value{GDBN} for the value of a variable in
2886 your program, the value is found in the selected frame. There are
2887 special @value{GDBN} commands to select whichever frame you are
2888 interested in.
2889
2890 When your program stops, @value{GDBN} automatically selects the
2891 currently executing frame and describes it briefly as the @code{frame}
2892 command does (@pxref{Frame Info, ,Information about a frame}).
2893
2894 @menu
2895 * Frames:: Stack frames
2896 * Backtrace:: Backtraces
2897 * Selection:: Selecting a frame
2898 * Frame Info:: Information on a frame
2899 @ifset MIPS
2900 * MIPS Stack:: MIPS machines and the function stack
2901 @end ifset
2902 @end menu
2903
2904 @node Frames
2905 @section Stack frames
2906
2907 @cindex frame
2908 @cindex stack frame
2909 The call stack is divided up into contiguous pieces called @dfn{stack
2910 frames}, or @dfn{frames} for short; each frame is the data associated
2911 with one call to one function. The frame contains the arguments given
2912 to the function, the function's local variables, and the address at
2913 which the function is executing.
2914
2915 @cindex initial frame
2916 @cindex outermost frame
2917 @cindex innermost frame
2918 When your program is started, the stack has only one frame, that of the
2919 function @code{main}. This is called the @dfn{initial} frame or the
2920 @dfn{outermost} frame. Each time a function is called, a new frame is
2921 made. Each time a function returns, the frame for that function invocation
2922 is eliminated. If a function is recursive, there can be many frames for
2923 the same function. The frame for the function in which execution is
2924 actually occurring is called the @dfn{innermost} frame. This is the most
2925 recently created of all the stack frames that still exist.
2926
2927 @cindex frame pointer
2928 Inside your program, stack frames are identified by their addresses. A
2929 stack frame consists of many bytes, each of which has its own address; each
2930 kind of computer has a convention for choosing one of those bytes whose
2931 address serves as the address of the frame. Usually this address is kept
2932 in a register called the @dfn{frame pointer register} while execution is
2933 going on in that frame.
2934
2935 @cindex frame number
2936 @value{GDBN} assigns numbers to all existing stack frames, starting with
2937 zero for the innermost frame, one for the frame that called it,
2938 and so on upward. These numbers do not really exist in your program;
2939 they are assigned by @value{GDBN} to give you a way of designating stack
2940 frames in @value{GDBN} commands.
2941
2942 @c below produces an acceptable overful hbox. --mew 13aug1993
2943 @cindex frameless execution
2944 Some compilers provide a way to compile functions so that they operate
2945 without stack frames. (For example, the @code{@value{GCC}} option
2946 @samp{-fomit-frame-pointer} will generate functions without a frame.)
2947 This is occasionally done with heavily used library functions to save
2948 the frame setup time. @value{GDBN} has limited facilities for dealing
2949 with these function invocations. If the innermost function invocation
2950 has no stack frame, @value{GDBN} will nevertheless regard it as though
2951 it had a separate frame, which is numbered zero as usual, allowing
2952 correct tracing of the function call chain. However, @value{GDBN} has
2953 no provision for frameless functions elsewhere in the stack.
2954
2955 @node Backtrace
2956 @section Backtraces
2957
2958 A backtrace is a summary of how your program got where it is. It shows one
2959 line per frame, for many frames, starting with the currently executing
2960 frame (frame zero), followed by its caller (frame one), and on up the
2961 stack.
2962
2963 @table @code
2964 @item backtrace
2965 @itemx bt
2966 @kindex backtrace
2967 @kindex bt
2968 Print a backtrace of the entire stack: one line per frame for all
2969 frames in the stack.
2970
2971 You can stop the backtrace at any time by typing the system interrupt
2972 character, normally @kbd{C-c}.
2973
2974 @item backtrace @var{n}
2975 @itemx bt @var{n}
2976 Similar, but print only the innermost @var{n} frames.
2977
2978 @item backtrace -@var{n}
2979 @itemx bt -@var{n}
2980 Similar, but print only the outermost @var{n} frames.
2981 @end table
2982
2983 @kindex where
2984 @kindex info stack
2985 @kindex info s
2986 The names @code{where} and @code{info stack} (abbreviated @code{info s})
2987 are additional aliases for @code{backtrace}.
2988
2989 Each line in the backtrace shows the frame number and the function name.
2990 The program counter value is also shown---unless you use @code{set
2991 print address off}. The backtrace also shows the source file name and
2992 line number, as well as the arguments to the function. The program
2993 counter value is omitted if it is at the beginning of the code for that
2994 line number.
2995
2996 Here is an example of a backtrace. It was made with the command
2997 @samp{bt 3}, so it shows the innermost three frames.
2998
2999 @smallexample
3000 @group
3001 #0 m4_traceon (obs=0x24eb0, argc=1, argv=0x2b8c8)
3002 at builtin.c:993
3003 #1 0x6e38 in expand_macro (sym=0x2b600) at macro.c:242
3004 #2 0x6840 in expand_token (obs=0x0, t=177664, td=0xf7fffb08)
3005 at macro.c:71
3006 (More stack frames follow...)
3007 @end group
3008 @end smallexample
3009
3010 @noindent
3011 The display for frame zero does not begin with a program counter
3012 value, indicating that your program has stopped at the beginning of the
3013 code for line @code{993} of @code{builtin.c}.
3014
3015 @node Selection
3016 @section Selecting a frame
3017
3018 Most commands for examining the stack and other data in your program work on
3019 whichever stack frame is selected at the moment. Here are the commands for
3020 selecting a stack frame; all of them finish by printing a brief description
3021 of the stack frame just selected.
3022
3023 @table @code
3024 @item frame @var{n}
3025 @itemx f @var{n}
3026 @kindex frame
3027 @kindex f
3028 Select frame number @var{n}. Recall that frame zero is the innermost
3029 (currently executing) frame, frame one is the frame that called the
3030 innermost one, and so on. The highest-numbered frame is the one for
3031 @code{main}.
3032
3033 @item frame @var{addr}
3034 @itemx f @var{addr}
3035 Select the frame at address @var{addr}. This is useful mainly if the
3036 chaining of stack frames has been damaged by a bug, making it
3037 impossible for @value{GDBN} to assign numbers properly to all frames. In
3038 addition, this can be useful when your program has multiple stacks and
3039 switches between them.
3040
3041 @ifset SPARC
3042 On the SPARC architecture, @code{frame} needs two addresses to
3043 select an arbitrary frame: a frame pointer and a stack pointer.
3044 @c note to future updaters: this is conditioned on a flag
3045 @c FRAME_SPECIFICATION_DYADIC in the tm-*.h files, currently only used
3046 @c by SPARC, hence the specific attribution. Generalize or list all
3047 @c possibilities if more supported machines start doing this.
3048 @end ifset
3049
3050 @item up @var{n}
3051 @kindex up
3052 Move @var{n} frames up the stack. For positive numbers @var{n}, this
3053 advances toward the outermost frame, to higher frame numbers, to frames
3054 that have existed longer. @var{n} defaults to one.
3055
3056 @item down @var{n}
3057 @kindex down
3058 @kindex do
3059 Move @var{n} frames down the stack. For positive numbers @var{n}, this
3060 advances toward the innermost frame, to lower frame numbers, to frames
3061 that were created more recently. @var{n} defaults to one. You may
3062 abbreviate @code{down} as @code{do}.
3063 @end table
3064
3065 All of these commands end by printing two lines of output describing the
3066 frame. The first line shows the frame number, the function name, the
3067 arguments, and the source file and line number of execution in that
3068 frame. The second line shows the text of that source line.
3069
3070 For example:
3071 @smallexample
3072 @group
3073 (@value{GDBP}) up
3074 #1 0x22f0 in main (argc=1, argv=0xf7fffbf4, env=0xf7fffbfc)
3075 at env.c:10
3076 10 read_input_file (argv[i]);
3077 @end group
3078 @end smallexample
3079
3080 After such a printout, the @code{list} command with no arguments will
3081 print ten lines centered on the point of execution in the frame.
3082 @xref{List, ,Printing source lines}.
3083
3084 @table @code
3085 @item up-silently @var{n}
3086 @itemx down-silently @var{n}
3087 @kindex down-silently
3088 @kindex up-silently
3089 These two commands are variants of @code{up} and @code{down},
3090 respectively; they differ in that they do their work silently, without
3091 causing display of the new frame. They are intended primarily for use
3092 in @value{GDBN} command scripts, where the output might be unnecessary and
3093 distracting.
3094 @end table
3095
3096 @node Frame Info
3097 @section Information about a frame
3098
3099 There are several other commands to print information about the selected
3100 stack frame.
3101
3102 @table @code
3103 @item frame
3104 @itemx f
3105 When used without any argument, this command does not change which
3106 frame is selected, but prints a brief description of the currently
3107 selected stack frame. It can be abbreviated @code{f}. With an
3108 argument, this command is used to select a stack frame.
3109 @xref{Selection, ,Selecting a frame}.
3110
3111 @item info frame
3112 @itemx info f
3113 @kindex info frame
3114 @kindex info f
3115 This command prints a verbose description of the selected stack frame,
3116 including the address of the frame, the addresses of the next frame down
3117 (called by this frame) and the next frame up (caller of this frame), the
3118 language that the source code corresponding to this frame was written in,
3119 the address of the frame's arguments, the program counter saved in it
3120 (the address of execution in the caller frame), and which registers
3121 were saved in the frame. The verbose description is useful when
3122 something has gone wrong that has made the stack format fail to fit
3123 the usual conventions.
3124
3125 @item info frame @var{addr}
3126 @itemx info f @var{addr}
3127 Print a verbose description of the frame at address @var{addr},
3128 without selecting that frame. The selected frame remains unchanged by
3129 this command.
3130
3131 @item info args
3132 @kindex info args
3133 Print the arguments of the selected frame, each on a separate line.
3134
3135 @item info locals
3136 @kindex info locals
3137 Print the local variables of the selected frame, each on a separate
3138 line. These are all variables (declared either static or automatic)
3139 accessible at the point of execution of the selected frame.
3140
3141 @ifclear CONLY
3142 @item info catch
3143 @kindex info catch
3144 @cindex catch exceptions
3145 @cindex exception handlers
3146 Print a list of all the exception handlers that are active in the
3147 current stack frame at the current point of execution. To see other
3148 exception handlers, visit the associated frame (using the @code{up},
3149 @code{down}, or @code{frame} commands); then type @code{info catch}.
3150 @xref{Exception Handling, ,Breakpoints and exceptions}.
3151 @end ifclear
3152 @end table
3153
3154 @ifset MIPS
3155 @node MIPS Stack
3156 @section MIPS machines and the function stack
3157
3158 @cindex stack on MIPS
3159 @cindex MIPS stack
3160 MIPS based computers use an unusual stack frame, which sometimes
3161 requires @value{GDBN} to search backward in the object code to find the
3162 beginning of a function.
3163
3164 @cindex response time, MIPS debugging
3165 To improve response time (especially for embedded applications, where
3166 @value{GDBN} may be restricted to a slow serial line for this search)
3167 you may want to limit the size of this search, using one of these
3168 commands:
3169 @c FIXME! So what happens when GDB does *not* find the beginning of a
3170 @c function?
3171
3172 @cindex @code{heuristic-fence-post} (MIPS)
3173 @table @code
3174 @item set heuristic-fence-post @var{limit}
3175 Restrict @var{GDBN} to examining at most @var{limit} bytes in its search
3176 for the beginning of a function. A value of @code{0} (the default)
3177 means there is no limit.
3178
3179 @item show heuristic-fence-post
3180 Display the current limit.
3181 @end table
3182
3183 @noindent
3184 These commands are available @emph{only} when @value{GDBN} is configured
3185 for debugging programs on MIPS processors.
3186 @end ifset
3187
3188 @node Source
3189 @chapter Examining Source Files
3190
3191 @value{GDBN} can print parts of your program's source, since the debugging
3192 information recorded in the program tells @value{GDBN} what source files were
3193 used to build it. When your program stops, @value{GDBN} spontaneously prints
3194 the line where it stopped. Likewise, when you select a stack frame
3195 (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a frame}), @value{GDBN} prints the line where
3196 execution in that frame has stopped. You can print other portions of
3197 source files by explicit command.
3198
3199 @ifclear DOSHOST
3200 If you use @value{GDBN} through its GNU Emacs interface, you may prefer to use
3201 Emacs facilities to view source; @pxref{Emacs, ,Using @value{GDBN} under GNU
3202 Emacs}.
3203 @end ifclear
3204
3205 @menu
3206 * List:: Printing source lines
3207 @ifclear DOSHOST
3208 * Search:: Searching source files
3209 @end ifclear
3210
3211 * Source Path:: Specifying source directories
3212 * Machine Code:: Source and machine code
3213 @end menu
3214
3215 @node List
3216 @section Printing source lines
3217
3218 @kindex list
3219 @kindex l
3220 To print lines from a source file, use the @code{list} command
3221 (abbreviated @code{l}). There are several ways to specify what part
3222 of the file you want to print.
3223
3224 Here are the forms of the @code{list} command most commonly used:
3225
3226 @table @code
3227 @item list @var{linenum}
3228 Print lines centered around line number @var{linenum} in the
3229 current source file.
3230
3231 @item list @var{function}
3232 Print lines centered around the beginning of function
3233 @var{function}.
3234
3235 @item list
3236 Print more lines. If the last lines printed were printed with a
3237 @code{list} command, this prints lines following the last lines
3238 printed; however, if the last line printed was a solitary line printed
3239 as part of displaying a stack frame (@pxref{Stack, ,Examining the
3240 Stack}), this prints lines centered around that line.
3241
3242 @item list -
3243 Print lines just before the lines last printed.
3244 @end table
3245
3246 By default, @value{GDBN} prints ten source lines with any of these forms of
3247 the @code{list} command. You can change this using @code{set listsize}:
3248
3249 @table @code
3250 @item set listsize @var{count}
3251 @kindex set listsize
3252 Make the @code{list} command display @var{count} source lines (unless
3253 the @code{list} argument explicitly specifies some other number).
3254
3255 @item show listsize
3256 @kindex show listsize
3257 Display the number of lines that @code{list} will currently display by
3258 default.
3259 @end table
3260
3261 Repeating a @code{list} command with @key{RET} discards the argument,
3262 so it is equivalent to typing just @code{list}. This is more useful
3263 than listing the same lines again. An exception is made for an
3264 argument of @samp{-}; that argument is preserved in repetition so that
3265 each repetition moves up in the source file.
3266
3267 @cindex linespec
3268 In general, the @code{list} command expects you to supply zero, one or two
3269 @dfn{linespecs}. Linespecs specify source lines; there are several ways
3270 of writing them but the effect is always to specify some source line.
3271 Here is a complete description of the possible arguments for @code{list}:
3272
3273 @table @code
3274 @item list @var{linespec}
3275 Print lines centered around the line specified by @var{linespec}.
3276
3277 @item list @var{first},@var{last}
3278 Print lines from @var{first} to @var{last}. Both arguments are
3279 linespecs.
3280
3281 @item list ,@var{last}
3282 Print lines ending with @var{last}.
3283
3284 @item list @var{first},
3285 Print lines starting with @var{first}.
3286
3287 @item list +
3288 Print lines just after the lines last printed.
3289
3290 @item list -
3291 Print lines just before the lines last printed.
3292
3293 @item list
3294 As described in the preceding table.
3295 @end table
3296
3297 Here are the ways of specifying a single source line---all the
3298 kinds of linespec.
3299
3300 @table @code
3301 @item @var{number}
3302 Specifies line @var{number} of the current source file.
3303 When a @code{list} command has two linespecs, this refers to
3304 the same source file as the first linespec.
3305
3306 @item +@var{offset}
3307 Specifies the line @var{offset} lines after the last line printed.
3308 When used as the second linespec in a @code{list} command that has
3309 two, this specifies the line @var{offset} lines down from the
3310 first linespec.
3311
3312 @item -@var{offset}
3313 Specifies the line @var{offset} lines before the last line printed.
3314
3315 @item @var{filename}:@var{number}
3316 Specifies line @var{number} in the source file @var{filename}.
3317
3318 @item @var{function}
3319 @c FIXME: "of the open-brace" is C-centric. When we add other langs...
3320 Specifies the line of the open-brace that begins the body of the
3321 function @var{function}.
3322
3323 @item @var{filename}:@var{function}
3324 Specifies the line of the open-brace that begins the body of the
3325 function @var{function} in the file @var{filename}. You only need the
3326 file name with a function name to avoid ambiguity when there are
3327 identically named functions in different source files.
3328
3329 @item *@var{address}
3330 Specifies the line containing the program address @var{address}.
3331 @var{address} may be any expression.
3332 @end table
3333
3334 @ifclear DOSHOST
3335 @node Search
3336 @section Searching source files
3337 @cindex searching
3338 @kindex reverse-search
3339
3340 There are two commands for searching through the current source file for a
3341 regular expression.
3342
3343 @table @code
3344 @item forward-search @var{regexp}
3345 @itemx search @var{regexp}
3346 @kindex search
3347 @kindex forward-search
3348 The command @samp{forward-search @var{regexp}} checks each line,
3349 starting with the one following the last line listed, for a match for
3350 @var{regexp}. It lists the line that is found. You can use
3351 synonym @samp{search @var{regexp}} or abbreviate the command name as
3352 @code{fo}.
3353
3354 @item reverse-search @var{regexp}
3355 The command @samp{reverse-search @var{regexp}} checks each line, starting
3356 with the one before the last line listed and going backward, for a match
3357 for @var{regexp}. It lists the line that is found. You can abbreviate
3358 this command as @code{rev}.
3359 @end table
3360 @end ifclear
3361
3362 @node Source Path
3363 @section Specifying source directories
3364
3365 @cindex source path
3366 @cindex directories for source files
3367 Executable programs sometimes do not record the directories of the source
3368 files from which they were compiled, just the names. Even when they do,
3369 the directories could be moved between the compilation and your debugging
3370 session. @value{GDBN} has a list of directories to search for source files;
3371 this is called the @dfn{source path}. Each time @value{GDBN} wants a source file,
3372 it tries all the directories in the list, in the order they are present
3373 in the list, until it finds a file with the desired name. Note that
3374 the executable search path is @emph{not} used for this purpose. Neither is
3375 the current working directory, unless it happens to be in the source
3376 path.
3377
3378 If @value{GDBN} cannot find a source file in the source path, and the object
3379 program records a directory, @value{GDBN} tries that directory too. If the
3380 source path is empty, and there is no record of the compilation
3381 directory, @value{GDBN} will, as a last resort, look in the current
3382 directory.
3383
3384 Whenever you reset or rearrange the source path, @value{GDBN} will clear out
3385 any information it has cached about where source files are found, where
3386 each line is in the file, etc.
3387
3388 @kindex directory
3389 When you start @value{GDBN}, its source path is empty.
3390 To add other directories, use the @code{directory} command.
3391
3392 @table @code
3393 @item directory @var{dirname} @dots{}
3394 Add directory @var{dirname} to the front of the source path. Several
3395 directory names may be given to this command, separated by @samp{:} or
3396 whitespace. You may specify a directory that is already in the source
3397 path; this moves it forward, so it will be searched sooner.
3398
3399 You can use the string @samp{$cdir} to refer to the compilation
3400 directory (if one is recorded), and @samp{$cwd} to refer to the current
3401 working directory. @samp{$cwd} is not the same as @samp{.}---the former
3402 tracks the current working directory as it changes during your @value{GDBN}
3403 session, while the latter is immediately expanded to the current
3404 directory at the time you add an entry to the source path.
3405
3406 @item directory
3407 Reset the source path to empty again. This requires confirmation.
3408
3409 @c RET-repeat for @code{directory} is explicitly disabled, but since
3410 @c repeating it would be a no-op we do not say that. (thanks to RMS)
3411
3412 @item show directories
3413 @kindex show directories
3414 Print the source path: show which directories it contains.
3415 @end table
3416
3417 If your source path is cluttered with directories that are no longer of
3418 interest, @value{GDBN} may sometimes cause confusion by finding the wrong
3419 versions of source. You can correct the situation as follows:
3420
3421 @enumerate
3422 @item
3423 Use @code{directory} with no argument to reset the source path to empty.
3424
3425 @item
3426 Use @code{directory} with suitable arguments to reinstall the
3427 directories you want in the source path. You can add all the
3428 directories in one command.
3429 @end enumerate
3430
3431 @node Machine Code
3432 @section Source and machine code
3433
3434 You can use the command @code{info line} to map source lines to program
3435 addresses (and vice versa), and the command @code{disassemble} to display
3436 a range of addresses as machine instructions.
3437
3438 @table @code
3439 @item info line @var{linespec}
3440 @kindex info line
3441 Print the starting and ending addresses of the compiled code for
3442 source line @var{linespec}. You can specify source lines in any of
3443 the ways understood by the @code{list} command (@pxref{List, ,Printing
3444 source lines}).
3445 @end table
3446
3447 For example, we can use @code{info line} to discover the location of
3448 the object code for the first line of function
3449 @code{m4_changequote}:
3450
3451 @smallexample
3452 (@value{GDBP}) info line m4_changecom
3453 Line 895 of "builtin.c" starts at pc 0x634c and ends at 0x6350.
3454 @end smallexample
3455
3456 @noindent
3457 We can also inquire (using @code{*@var{addr}} as the form for
3458 @var{linespec}) what source line covers a particular address:
3459 @smallexample
3460 (@value{GDBP}) info line *0x63ff
3461 Line 926 of "builtin.c" starts at pc 0x63e4 and ends at 0x6404.
3462 @end smallexample
3463
3464 @cindex @code{$_} and @code{info line}
3465 After @code{info line}, the default address for the @code{x} command
3466 is changed to the starting address of the line, so that @samp{x/i} is
3467 sufficient to begin examining the machine code (@pxref{Memory,
3468 ,Examining memory}). Also, this address is saved as the value of the
3469 convenience variable @code{$_} (@pxref{Convenience Vars, ,Convenience
3470 variables}).
3471
3472 @table @code
3473 @kindex disassemble
3474 @item disassemble
3475 @cindex assembly instructions
3476 @cindex instructions, assembly
3477 @cindex machine instructions
3478 @cindex listing machine instructions
3479 This specialized command dumps a range of memory as machine
3480 instructions. The default memory range is the function surrounding the
3481 program counter of the selected frame. A single argument to this
3482 command is a program counter value; the function surrounding this value
3483 will be dumped. Two arguments specify a range of addresses (first
3484 inclusive, second exclusive) to dump.
3485 @end table
3486
3487 @ifclear H8EXCLUSIVE
3488 We can use @code{disassemble} to inspect the object code
3489 range shown in the last @code{info line} example (the example
3490 shows SPARC machine instructions):
3491
3492
3493 @smallexample
3494 (@value{GDBP}) disas 0x63e4 0x6404
3495 Dump of assembler code from 0x63e4 to 0x6404:
3496 0x63e4 <builtin_init+5340>: ble 0x63f8 <builtin_init+5360>
3497 0x63e8 <builtin_init+5344>: sethi %hi(0x4c00), %o0
3498 0x63ec <builtin_init+5348>: ld [%i1+4], %o0
3499 0x63f0 <builtin_init+5352>: b 0x63fc <builtin_init+5364>
3500 0x63f4 <builtin_init+5356>: ld [%o0+4], %o0
3501 0x63f8 <builtin_init+5360>: or %o0, 0x1a4, %o0
3502 0x63fc <builtin_init+5364>: call 0x9288 <path_search>
3503 0x6400 <builtin_init+5368>: nop
3504 End of assembler dump.
3505 @end smallexample
3506 @end ifclear
3507
3508 @ifset H8EXCLUSIVE
3509 For example, here is the beginning of the output for the
3510 disassembly of a function @code{fact}:
3511
3512
3513 @smallexample
3514 (@value{GDBP}) disas fact
3515 Dump of assembler code for function fact:
3516 to 0x808c:
3517 0x802c <fact>: 6d f2 mov.w r2,@@-r7
3518 0x802e <fact+2>: 6d f3 mov.w r3,@@-r7
3519 0x8030 <fact+4>: 6d f6 mov.w r6,@@-r7
3520 0x8032 <fact+6>: 0d 76 mov.w r7,r6
3521 0x8034 <fact+8>: 6f 70 00 08 mov.w @@(0x8,r7),r0
3522 0x8038 <fact+12> 19 11 sub.w r1,r1
3523 .
3524 .
3525 .
3526 @end smallexample
3527 @end ifset
3528
3529 @node Data
3530 @chapter Examining Data
3531
3532 @cindex printing data
3533 @cindex examining data
3534 @kindex print
3535 @kindex inspect
3536 @c "inspect" is not quite a synonym if you are using Epoch, which we do not
3537 @c document because it is nonstandard... Under Epoch it displays in a
3538 @c different window or something like that.
3539 The usual way to examine data in your program is with the @code{print}
3540 command (abbreviated @code{p}), or its synonym @code{inspect}.
3541 @ifclear CONLY
3542 It evaluates and prints the value of an expression of the language your
3543 program is written in (@pxref{Languages, ,Using @value{GDBN} with Different
3544 Languages}).
3545 @end ifclear
3546
3547 @table @code
3548 @item print @var{exp}
3549 @itemx print /@var{f} @var{exp}
3550 @var{exp} is an expression (in the source language). By default the
3551 value of @var{exp} is printed in a format appropriate to its data type;
3552 you can choose a different format by specifying @samp{/@var{f}}, where
3553 @var{f} is a letter specifying the format; @pxref{Output Formats,,Output
3554 formats}.
3555
3556 @item print
3557 @itemx print /@var{f}
3558 If you omit @var{exp}, @value{GDBN} displays the last value again (from the
3559 @dfn{value history}; @pxref{Value History, ,Value history}). This allows you to
3560 conveniently inspect the same value in an alternative format.
3561 @end table
3562
3563 A more low-level way of examining data is with the @code{x} command.
3564 It examines data in memory at a specified address and prints it in a
3565 specified format. @xref{Memory, ,Examining memory}.
3566
3567 If you are interested in information about types, or about how the fields
3568 of a struct
3569 @ifclear CONLY
3570 or class
3571 @end ifclear
3572 are declared, use the @code{ptype @var{exp}}
3573 command rather than @code{print}. @xref{Symbols, ,Examining the Symbol Table}.
3574
3575 @menu
3576 * Expressions:: Expressions
3577 * Variables:: Program variables
3578 * Arrays:: Artificial arrays
3579 * Output Formats:: Output formats
3580 * Memory:: Examining memory
3581 * Auto Display:: Automatic display
3582 * Print Settings:: Print settings
3583 * Value History:: Value history
3584 * Convenience Vars:: Convenience variables
3585 * Registers:: Registers
3586 @ifclear HAVE-FLOAT
3587 * Floating Point Hardware:: Floating point hardware
3588 @end ifclear
3589 @end menu
3590
3591 @node Expressions
3592 @section Expressions
3593
3594 @cindex expressions
3595 @code{print} and many other @value{GDBN} commands accept an expression and
3596 compute its value. Any kind of constant, variable or operator defined
3597 by the programming language you are using is valid in an expression in
3598 @value{GDBN}. This includes conditional expressions, function calls, casts
3599 and string constants. It unfortunately does not include symbols defined
3600 by preprocessor @code{#define} commands.
3601
3602 @ifclear CONLY
3603 Because C is so widespread, most of the expressions shown in examples in
3604 this manual are in C. @xref{Languages, , Using @value{GDBN} with Different
3605 Languages}, for information on how to use expressions in other
3606 languages.
3607
3608 In this section, we discuss operators that you can use in @value{GDBN}
3609 expressions regardless of your programming language.
3610
3611 Casts are supported in all languages, not just in C, because it is so
3612 useful to cast a number into a pointer so as to examine a structure
3613 at that address in memory.
3614 @c FIXME: casts supported---Mod2 true?
3615 @end ifclear
3616
3617 @value{GDBN} supports these operators in addition to those of programming
3618 languages:
3619
3620 @table @code
3621 @item @@
3622 @samp{@@} is a binary operator for treating parts of memory as arrays.
3623 @xref{Arrays, ,Artificial arrays}, for more information.
3624
3625 @item ::
3626 @samp{::} allows you to specify a variable in terms of the file or
3627 function where it is defined. @xref{Variables, ,Program variables}.
3628
3629 @item @{@var{type}@} @var{addr}
3630 @cindex @{@var{type}@}
3631 @cindex type casting memory
3632 @cindex memory, viewing as typed object
3633 @cindex casts, to view memory
3634 Refers to an object of type @var{type} stored at address @var{addr} in
3635 memory. @var{addr} may be any expression whose value is an integer or
3636 pointer (but parentheses are required around binary operators, just as in
3637 a cast). This construct is allowed regardless of what kind of data is
3638 normally supposed to reside at @var{addr}.
3639 @end table
3640
3641 @node Variables
3642 @section Program variables
3643
3644 The most common kind of expression to use is the name of a variable
3645 in your program.
3646
3647 Variables in expressions are understood in the selected stack frame
3648 (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a frame}); they must either be global
3649 (or static) or be visible according to the scope rules of the
3650 programming language from the point of execution in that frame. This
3651 means that in the function
3652
3653 @example
3654 foo (a)
3655 int a;
3656 @{
3657 bar (a);
3658 @{
3659 int b = test ();
3660 bar (b);
3661 @}
3662 @}
3663 @end example
3664
3665 @noindent
3666 you can examine and use the variable @code{a} whenever your program is
3667 executing within the function @code{foo}, but you can only use or
3668 examine the variable @code{b} while your program is executing inside
3669 the block where @code{b} is declared.
3670
3671 @cindex variable name conflict
3672 There is an exception: you can refer to a variable or function whose
3673 scope is a single source file even if the current execution point is not
3674 in this file. But it is possible to have more than one such variable or
3675 function with the same name (in different source files). If that
3676 happens, referring to that name has unpredictable effects. If you wish,
3677 you can specify a static variable in a particular function or file,
3678 using the colon-colon notation:
3679
3680 @cindex colon-colon
3681 @iftex
3682 @c info cannot cope with a :: index entry, but why deprive hard copy readers?
3683 @kindex ::
3684 @end iftex
3685 @example
3686 @var{file}::@var{variable}
3687 @var{function}::@var{variable}
3688 @end example
3689
3690 @noindent
3691 Here @var{file} or @var{function} is the name of the context for the
3692 static @var{variable}. In the case of file names, you can use quotes to
3693 make sure @value{GDBN} parses the file name as a single word---for example,
3694 to print a global value of @code{x} defined in @file{f2.c}:
3695
3696 @example
3697 (@value{GDBP}) p 'f2.c'::x
3698 @end example
3699
3700 @ifclear CONLY
3701 @cindex C++ scope resolution
3702 This use of @samp{::} is very rarely in conflict with the very similar
3703 use of the same notation in C++. @value{GDBN} also supports use of the C++
3704 scope resolution operator in @value{GDBN} expressions.
3705 @c FIXME: Um, so what happens in one of those rare cases where it's in
3706 @c conflict?? --mew
3707 @end ifclear
3708
3709 @cindex wrong values
3710 @cindex variable values, wrong
3711 @quotation
3712 @emph{Warning:} Occasionally, a local variable may appear to have the
3713 wrong value at certain points in a function---just after entry to a new
3714 scope, and just before exit.
3715 @end quotation
3716 You may see this problem when you are stepping by machine instructions.
3717 This is because on most machines, it takes more than one instruction to
3718 set up a stack frame (including local variable definitions); if you are
3719 stepping by machine instructions, variables may appear to have the wrong
3720 values until the stack frame is completely built. On exit, it usually
3721 also takes more than one machine instruction to destroy a stack frame;
3722 after you begin stepping through that group of instructions, local
3723 variable definitions may be gone.
3724
3725 @node Arrays
3726 @section Artificial arrays
3727
3728 @cindex artificial array
3729 @kindex @@
3730 It is often useful to print out several successive objects of the
3731 same type in memory; a section of an array, or an array of
3732 dynamically determined size for which only a pointer exists in the
3733 program.
3734
3735 You can do this by referring to a contiguous span of memory as an
3736 @dfn{artificial array}, using the binary operator @samp{@@}. The left
3737 operand of @samp{@@} should be the first element of the desired array,
3738 as an individual object. The right operand should be the desired length
3739 of the array. The result is an array value whose elements are all of
3740 the type of the left argument. The first element is actually the left
3741 argument; the second element comes from bytes of memory immediately
3742 following those that hold the first element, and so on. Here is an
3743 example. If a program says
3744
3745 @example
3746 int *array = (int *) malloc (len * sizeof (int));
3747 @end example
3748
3749 @noindent
3750 you can print the contents of @code{array} with
3751
3752 @example
3753 p *array@@len
3754 @end example
3755
3756 The left operand of @samp{@@} must reside in memory. Array values made
3757 with @samp{@@} in this way behave just like other arrays in terms of
3758 subscripting, and are coerced to pointers when used in expressions.
3759 Artificial arrays most often appear in expressions via the value history
3760 (@pxref{Value History, ,Value history}), after printing one out.
3761
3762 Sometimes the artificial array mechanism is not quite enough; in
3763 moderately complex data structures, the elements of interest may not
3764 actually be adjacent---for example, if you are interested in the values
3765 of pointers in an array. One useful work-around in this situation is
3766 to use a convenience variable (@pxref{Convenience Vars, ,Convenience
3767 variables}) as a counter in an expression that prints the first
3768 interesting value, and then repeat that expression via @key{RET}. For
3769 instance, suppose you have an array @code{dtab} of pointers to
3770 structures, and you are interested in the values of a field @code{fv}
3771 in each structure. Here is an example of what you might type:
3772
3773 @example
3774 set $i = 0
3775 p dtab[$i++]->fv
3776 @key{RET}
3777 @key{RET}
3778 @dots{}
3779 @end example
3780
3781 @node Output Formats
3782 @section Output formats
3783
3784 @cindex formatted output
3785 @cindex output formats
3786 By default, @value{GDBN} prints a value according to its data type. Sometimes
3787 this is not what you want. For example, you might want to print a number
3788 in hex, or a pointer in decimal. Or you might want to view data in memory
3789 at a certain address as a character string or as an instruction. To do
3790 these things, specify an @dfn{output format} when you print a value.
3791
3792 The simplest use of output formats is to say how to print a value
3793 already computed. This is done by starting the arguments of the
3794 @code{print} command with a slash and a format letter. The format
3795 letters supported are:
3796
3797 @table @code
3798 @item x
3799 Regard the bits of the value as an integer, and print the integer in
3800 hexadecimal.
3801
3802 @item d
3803 Print as integer in signed decimal.
3804
3805 @item u
3806 Print as integer in unsigned decimal.
3807
3808 @item o
3809 Print as integer in octal.
3810
3811 @item t
3812 Print as integer in binary. The letter @samp{t} stands for ``two''.
3813 @footnote{@samp{b} cannot be used because these format letters are also
3814 used with the @code{x} command, where @samp{b} stands for ``byte'';
3815 @pxref{Memory,,Examining memory}.}
3816
3817 @item a
3818 Print as an address, both absolute in hex and as an offset from the
3819 nearest preceding symbol. This format can be used to discover where (in
3820 what function) an unknown address is located:
3821
3822 @example
3823 (@value{GDBP}) p/a 0x54320
3824 $3 = 0x54320 <_initialize_vx+396>
3825 @end example
3826
3827 @item c
3828 Regard as an integer and print it as a character constant.
3829
3830 @item f
3831 Regard the bits of the value as a floating point number and print
3832 using typical floating point syntax.
3833 @end table
3834
3835 For example, to print the program counter in hex (@pxref{Registers}), type
3836
3837 @example
3838 p/x $pc
3839 @end example
3840
3841 @noindent
3842 Note that no space is required before the slash; this is because command
3843 names in @value{GDBN} cannot contain a slash.
3844
3845 To reprint the last value in the value history with a different format,
3846 you can use the @code{print} command with just a format and no
3847 expression. For example, @samp{p/x} reprints the last value in hex.
3848
3849 @node Memory
3850 @section Examining memory
3851
3852 You can use the command @code{x} (for ``examine'') to examine memory in
3853 any of several formats, independently of your program's data types.
3854
3855 @cindex examining memory
3856 @table @code
3857 @kindex x
3858 @item x/@var{nfu} @var{addr}
3859 @itemx x @var{addr}
3860 @itemx x
3861 Use the @code{x} command to examine memory.
3862 @end table
3863
3864 @var{n}, @var{f}, and @var{u} are all optional parameters that specify how
3865 much memory to display and how to format it; @var{addr} is an
3866 expression giving the address where you want to start displaying memory.
3867 If you use defaults for @var{nfu}, you need not type the slash @samp{/}.
3868 Several commands set convenient defaults for @var{addr}.
3869
3870 @table @r
3871 @item @var{n}, the repeat count
3872 The repeat count is a decimal integer; the default is 1. It specifies
3873 how much memory (counting by units @var{u}) to display.
3874 @c This really is **decimal**; unaffected by 'set radix' as of GDB
3875 @c 4.1.2.
3876
3877 @item @var{f}, the display format
3878 The display format is one of the formats used by @code{print},
3879 or @samp{s} (null-terminated string) or @samp{i} (machine instruction).
3880 The default is @samp{x} (hexadecimal) initially, or the format from the
3881 last time you used either @code{x} or @code{print}.
3882
3883 @item @var{u}, the unit size
3884 The unit size is any of
3885
3886 @table @code
3887 @item b
3888 Bytes.
3889 @item h
3890 Halfwords (two bytes).
3891 @item w
3892 Words (four bytes). This is the initial default.
3893 @item g
3894 Giant words (eight bytes).
3895 @end table
3896
3897 Each time you specify a unit size with @code{x}, that size becomes the
3898 default unit the next time you use @code{x}. (For the @samp{s} and
3899 @samp{i} formats, the unit size is ignored and is normally not written.)
3900
3901 @item @var{addr}, starting display address
3902 @var{addr} is the address where you want @value{GDBN} to begin displaying
3903 memory. The expression need not have a pointer value (though it may);
3904 it is always interpreted as an integer address of a byte of memory.
3905 @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}, for more information on expressions. The default for
3906 @var{addr} is usually just after the last address examined---but several
3907 other commands also set the default address: @code{info breakpoints} (to
3908 the address of the last breakpoint listed), @code{info line} (to the
3909 starting address of a line), and @code{print} (if you use it to display
3910 a value from memory).
3911 @end table
3912
3913 For example, @samp{x/3uh 0x54320} is a request to display three halfwords
3914 (@code{h}) of memory, formatted as unsigned decimal integers (@samp{u}),
3915 starting at address @code{0x54320}. @samp{x/4xw $sp} prints the four
3916 words (@samp{w}) of memory above the stack pointer (here, @samp{$sp};
3917 @pxref{Registers}) in hexadecimal (@samp{x}).
3918
3919 Since the letters indicating unit sizes are all distinct from the
3920 letters specifying output formats, you do not have to remember whether
3921 unit size or format comes first; either order will work. The output
3922 specifications @samp{4xw} and @samp{4wx} mean exactly the same thing.
3923 (However, the count @var{n} must come first; @samp{wx4} will not work.)
3924
3925 Even though the unit size @var{u} is ignored for the formats @samp{s}
3926 and @samp{i}, you might still want to use a count @var{n}; for example,
3927 @samp{3i} specifies that you want to see three machine instructions,
3928 including any operands. The command @code{disassemble} gives an
3929 alternative way of inspecting machine instructions; @pxref{Machine
3930 Code,,Source and machine code}.
3931
3932 All the defaults for the arguments to @code{x} are designed to make it
3933 easy to continue scanning memory with minimal specifications each time
3934 you use @code{x}. For example, after you have inspected three machine
3935 instructions with @samp{x/3i @var{addr}}, you can inspect the next seven
3936 with just @samp{x/7}. If you use @key{RET} to repeat the @code{x} command,
3937 the repeat count @var{n} is used again; the other arguments default as
3938 for successive uses of @code{x}.
3939
3940 @cindex @code{$_}, @code{$__}, and value history
3941 The addresses and contents printed by the @code{x} command are not saved
3942 in the value history because there is often too much of them and they
3943 would get in the way. Instead, @value{GDBN} makes these values available for
3944 subsequent use in expressions as values of the convenience variables
3945 @code{$_} and @code{$__}. After an @code{x} command, the last address
3946 examined is available for use in expressions in the convenience variable
3947 @code{$_}. The contents of that address, as examined, are available in
3948 the convenience variable @code{$__}.
3949
3950 If the @code{x} command has a repeat count, the address and contents saved
3951 are from the last memory unit printed; this is not the same as the last
3952 address printed if several units were printed on the last line of output.
3953
3954 @node Auto Display
3955 @section Automatic display
3956 @cindex automatic display
3957 @cindex display of expressions
3958
3959 If you find that you want to print the value of an expression frequently
3960 (to see how it changes), you might want to add it to the @dfn{automatic
3961 display list} so that @value{GDBN} will print its value each time your program stops.
3962 Each expression added to the list is given a number to identify it;
3963 to remove an expression from the list, you specify that number.
3964 The automatic display looks like this:
3965
3966 @example
3967 2: foo = 38
3968 3: bar[5] = (struct hack *) 0x3804
3969 @end example
3970
3971 @noindent
3972 This display shows item numbers, expressions and their current values. As with
3973 displays you request manually using @code{x} or @code{print}, you can
3974 specify the output format you prefer; in fact, @code{display} decides
3975 whether to use @code{print} or @code{x} depending on how elaborate your
3976 format specification is---it uses @code{x} if you specify a unit size,
3977 or one of the two formats (@samp{i} and @samp{s}) that are only
3978 supported by @code{x}; otherwise it uses @code{print}.
3979
3980 @table @code
3981 @item display @var{exp}
3982 @kindex display
3983 Add the expression @var{exp} to the list of expressions to display
3984 each time your program stops. @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}.
3985
3986 @code{display} will not repeat if you press @key{RET} again after using it.
3987
3988 @item display/@var{fmt} @var{exp}
3989 For @var{fmt} specifying only a display format and not a size or
3990 count, add the expression @var{exp} to the auto-display list but
3991 arrange to display it each time in the specified format @var{fmt}.
3992 @xref{Output Formats,,Output formats}.
3993
3994 @item display/@var{fmt} @var{addr}
3995 For @var{fmt} @samp{i} or @samp{s}, or including a unit-size or a
3996 number of units, add the expression @var{addr} as a memory address to
3997 be examined each time your program stops. Examining means in effect
3998 doing @samp{x/@var{fmt} @var{addr}}. @xref{Memory, ,Examining memory}.
3999 @end table
4000
4001 For example, @samp{display/i $pc} can be helpful, to see the machine
4002 instruction about to be executed each time execution stops (@samp{$pc}
4003 is a common name for the program counter; @pxref{Registers}).
4004
4005 @table @code
4006 @item undisplay @var{dnums}@dots{}
4007 @itemx delete display @var{dnums}@dots{}
4008 @kindex delete display
4009 @kindex undisplay
4010 Remove item numbers @var{dnums} from the list of expressions to display.
4011
4012 @code{undisplay} will not repeat if you press @key{RET} after using it.
4013 (Otherwise you would just get the error @samp{No display number @dots{}}.)
4014
4015 @item disable display @var{dnums}@dots{}
4016 @kindex disable display
4017 Disable the display of item numbers @var{dnums}. A disabled display
4018 item is not printed automatically, but is not forgotten. It may be
4019 enabled again later.
4020
4021 @item enable display @var{dnums}@dots{}
4022 @kindex enable display
4023 Enable display of item numbers @var{dnums}. It becomes effective once
4024 again in auto display of its expression, until you specify otherwise.
4025
4026 @item display
4027 Display the current values of the expressions on the list, just as is
4028 done when your program stops.
4029
4030 @item info display
4031 @kindex info display
4032 Print the list of expressions previously set up to display
4033 automatically, each one with its item number, but without showing the
4034 values. This includes disabled expressions, which are marked as such.
4035 It also includes expressions which would not be displayed right now
4036 because they refer to automatic variables not currently available.
4037 @end table
4038
4039 If a display expression refers to local variables, then it does not make
4040 sense outside the lexical context for which it was set up. Such an
4041 expression is disabled when execution enters a context where one of its
4042 variables is not defined. For example, if you give the command
4043 @code{display last_char} while inside a function with an argument
4044 @code{last_char}, then this argument will be displayed while your program
4045 continues to stop inside that function. When it stops elsewhere---where
4046 there is no variable @code{last_char}---display is disabled. The next time
4047 your program stops where @code{last_char} is meaningful, you can enable the
4048 display expression once again.
4049
4050 @node Print Settings
4051 @section Print settings
4052
4053 @cindex format options
4054 @cindex print settings
4055 @value{GDBN} provides the following ways to control how arrays, structures,
4056 and symbols are printed.
4057
4058 @noindent
4059 These settings are useful for debugging programs in any language:
4060
4061 @table @code
4062 @item set print address
4063 @itemx set print address on
4064 @kindex set print address
4065 @value{GDBN} will print memory addresses showing the location of stack
4066 traces, structure values, pointer values, breakpoints, and so forth,
4067 even when it also displays the contents of those addresses. The default
4068 is on. For example, this is what a stack frame display looks like, with
4069 @code{set print address on}:
4070
4071 @smallexample
4072 @group
4073 (@value{GDBP}) f
4074 #0 set_quotes (lq=0x34c78 "<<", rq=0x34c88 ">>")
4075 at input.c:530
4076 530 if (lquote != def_lquote)
4077 @end group
4078 @end smallexample
4079
4080 @item set print address off
4081 Do not print addresses when displaying their contents. For example,
4082 this is the same stack frame displayed with @code{set print address off}:
4083
4084 @smallexample
4085 @group
4086 (@value{GDBP}) set print addr off
4087 (@value{GDBP}) f
4088 #0 set_quotes (lq="<<", rq=">>") at input.c:530
4089 530 if (lquote != def_lquote)
4090 @end group
4091 @end smallexample
4092
4093 You can use @samp{set print address off} to eliminate all machine
4094 dependent displays from the @value{GDBN} interface. For example, with
4095 @code{print address off}, you should get the same text for backtraces on
4096 all machines---whether or not they involve pointer arguments.
4097
4098 @item show print address
4099 @kindex show print address
4100 Show whether or not addresses are to be printed.
4101 @end table
4102
4103 When @value{GDBN} prints a symbolic address, it normally prints the
4104 closest earlier symbol plus an offset. If that symbol does not uniquely
4105 identify the address (for example, it is a name whose scope is a single
4106 source file), you may need to disambiguate. One way to do this is with
4107 @code{info line}, for example @code{info line *0x4537}. Alternately,
4108 you can set @value{GDBN} to print the source file and line number when
4109 it prints a symbolic address:
4110
4111 @table @code
4112 @item set print symbol-filename on
4113 @kindex set print symbol-filename
4114 Tell @value{GDBN} to print the source file name and line number of a
4115 symbol in the symbolic form of an address.
4116
4117 @item set print symbol-filename off
4118 Do not print source file name and line number of a symbol. This is the
4119 default.
4120
4121 @item show print symbol-filename
4122 @kindex show print symbol-filename
4123 Show whether or not @value{GDBN} will print the source file name and
4124 line number of a symbol in the symbolic form of an address.
4125 @end table
4126
4127 Also, you may wish to see the symbolic form only if the address being
4128 printed is reasonably close to the closest earlier symbol:
4129
4130 @table @code
4131 @item set print max-symbolic-offset @var{max-offset}
4132 @kindex set print max-symbolic-offset
4133 Tell @value{GDBN} to only display the symbolic form of an address if the
4134 offset between the closest earlier symbol and the address is less than
4135 @var{max-offset}. The default is 0, which means to always print the
4136 symbolic form of an address, if any symbol precedes it.
4137
4138 @item show print max-symbolic-offset
4139 @kindex show print max-symbolic-offset
4140 Ask how large the maximum offset is that @value{GDBN} will print in a
4141 symbolic address.
4142 @end table
4143
4144 @table @code
4145 @item set print array
4146 @itemx set print array on
4147 @kindex set print array
4148 @value{GDBN} will pretty-print arrays. This format is more convenient to read,
4149 but uses more space. The default is off.
4150
4151 @item set print array off
4152 Return to compressed format for arrays.
4153
4154 @item show print array
4155 @kindex show print array
4156 Show whether compressed or pretty format is selected for displaying
4157 arrays.
4158
4159 @item set print elements @var{number-of-elements}
4160 @kindex set print elements
4161 If @value{GDBN} is printing a large array, it will stop printing after it has
4162 printed the number of elements set by the @code{set print elements} command.
4163 This limit also applies to the display of strings.
4164 Setting the number of elements to zero means that the printing is unlimited.
4165
4166 @item show print elements
4167 @kindex show print elements
4168 Display the number of elements of a large array that @value{GDBN} will print
4169 before losing patience.
4170
4171 @item set print pretty on
4172 @kindex set print pretty
4173 Cause @value{GDBN} to print structures in an indented format with one member per
4174 line, like this:
4175
4176 @smallexample
4177 @group
4178 $1 = @{
4179 next = 0x0,
4180 flags = @{
4181 sweet = 1,
4182 sour = 1
4183 @},
4184 meat = 0x54 "Pork"
4185 @}
4186 @end group
4187 @end smallexample
4188
4189 @item set print pretty off
4190 Cause @value{GDBN} to print structures in a compact format, like this:
4191
4192 @smallexample
4193 @group
4194 $1 = @{next = 0x0, flags = @{sweet = 1, sour = 1@}, \
4195 meat = 0x54 "Pork"@}
4196 @end group
4197 @end smallexample
4198
4199 @noindent
4200 This is the default format.
4201
4202 @item show print pretty
4203 @kindex show print pretty
4204 Show which format @value{GDBN} will use to print structures.
4205
4206 @item set print sevenbit-strings on
4207 @kindex set print sevenbit-strings
4208 Print using only seven-bit characters; if this option is set,
4209 @value{GDBN} will display any eight-bit characters (in strings or character
4210 values) using the notation @code{\}@var{nnn}. For example, @kbd{M-a} is
4211 displayed as @code{\341}.
4212
4213 @item set print sevenbit-strings off
4214 Print using either seven-bit or eight-bit characters, as required. This
4215 is the default.
4216
4217 @item show print sevenbit-strings
4218 @kindex show print sevenbit-strings
4219 Show whether or not @value{GDBN} will print only seven-bit characters.
4220
4221 @item set print union on
4222 @kindex set print union
4223 Tell @value{GDBN} to print unions which are contained in structures. This is the
4224 default setting.
4225
4226 @item set print union off
4227 Tell @value{GDBN} not to print unions which are contained in structures.
4228
4229 @item show print union
4230 @kindex show print union
4231 Ask @value{GDBN} whether or not it will print unions which are contained in
4232 structures.
4233
4234 For example, given the declarations
4235
4236 @smallexample
4237 typedef enum @{Tree, Bug@} Species;
4238 typedef enum @{Big_tree, Acorn, Seedling@} Tree_forms;
4239 typedef enum @{Caterpillar, Cocoon, Butterfly@}
4240 Bug_forms;
4241
4242 struct thing @{
4243 Species it;
4244 union @{
4245 Tree_forms tree;
4246 Bug_forms bug;
4247 @} form;
4248 @};
4249
4250 struct thing foo = @{Tree, @{Acorn@}@};
4251 @end smallexample
4252
4253 @noindent
4254 with @code{set print union on} in effect @samp{p foo} would print
4255
4256 @smallexample
4257 $1 = @{it = Tree, form = @{tree = Acorn, bug = Cocoon@}@}
4258 @end smallexample
4259
4260 @noindent
4261 and with @code{set print union off} in effect it would print
4262
4263 @smallexample
4264 $1 = @{it = Tree, form = @{...@}@}
4265 @end smallexample
4266 @end table
4267
4268 @ifclear CONLY
4269 @need 1000
4270 @noindent
4271 These settings are of interest when debugging C++ programs:
4272
4273 @table @code
4274 @item set print demangle
4275 @itemx set print demangle on
4276 @kindex set print demangle
4277 Print C++ names in their source form rather than in the encoded
4278 (``mangled'') form passed to the assembler and linker for type-safe
4279 linkage. The default is @samp{on}.
4280
4281 @item show print demangle
4282 @kindex show print demangle
4283 Show whether C++ names will be printed in mangled or demangled form.
4284
4285 @item set print asm-demangle
4286 @itemx set print asm-demangle on
4287 @kindex set print asm-demangle
4288 Print C++ names in their source form rather than their mangled form, even
4289 in assembler code printouts such as instruction disassemblies.
4290 The default is off.
4291
4292 @item show print asm-demangle
4293 @kindex show print asm-demangle
4294 Show whether C++ names in assembly listings will be printed in mangled
4295 or demangled form.
4296
4297 @item set demangle-style @var{style}
4298 @kindex set demangle-style
4299 @cindex C++ symbol decoding style
4300 @cindex symbol decoding style, C++
4301 Choose among several encoding schemes used by different compilers to
4302 represent C++ names. The choices for @var{style} are currently:
4303
4304 @table @code
4305 @item auto
4306 Allow @value{GDBN} to choose a decoding style by inspecting your program.
4307
4308 @item gnu
4309 Decode based on the GNU C++ compiler (@code{g++}) encoding algorithm.
4310
4311 @item lucid
4312 Decode based on the Lucid C++ compiler (@code{lcc}) encoding algorithm.
4313
4314 @item arm
4315 Decode using the algorithm in the @cite{C++ Annotated Reference Manual}.
4316 @strong{Warning:} this setting alone is not sufficient to allow
4317 debugging @code{cfront}-generated executables. @value{GDBN} would
4318 require further enhancement to permit that.
4319 @end table
4320
4321 @item show demangle-style
4322 @kindex show demangle-style
4323 Display the encoding style currently in use for decoding C++ symbols.
4324
4325 @item set print object
4326 @itemx set print object on
4327 @kindex set print object
4328 When displaying a pointer to an object, identify the @emph{actual}
4329 (derived) type of the object rather than the @emph{declared} type, using
4330 the virtual function table.
4331
4332 @item set print object off
4333 Display only the declared type of objects, without reference to the
4334 virtual function table. This is the default setting.
4335
4336 @item show print object
4337 @kindex show print object
4338 Show whether actual, or declared, object types will be displayed.
4339
4340 @item set print vtbl
4341 @itemx set print vtbl on
4342 @kindex set print vtbl
4343 Pretty print C++ virtual function tables. The default is off.
4344
4345 @item set print vtbl off
4346 Do not pretty print C++ virtual function tables.
4347
4348 @item show print vtbl
4349 @kindex show print vtbl
4350 Show whether C++ virtual function tables are pretty printed, or not.
4351 @end table
4352 @end ifclear
4353
4354 @node Value History
4355 @section Value history
4356
4357 @cindex value history
4358 Values printed by the @code{print} command are saved in the @value{GDBN} @dfn{value
4359 history} so that you can refer to them in other expressions. Values are
4360 kept until the symbol table is re-read or discarded (for example with
4361 the @code{file} or @code{symbol-file} commands). When the symbol table
4362 changes, the value history is discarded, since the values may contain
4363 pointers back to the types defined in the symbol table.
4364
4365 @cindex @code{$}
4366 @cindex @code{$$}
4367 @cindex history number
4368 The values printed are given @dfn{history numbers} by which you can
4369 refer to them. These are successive integers starting with one.
4370 @code{print} shows you the history number assigned to a value by
4371 printing @samp{$@var{num} = } before the value; here @var{num} is the
4372 history number.
4373
4374 To refer to any previous value, use @samp{$} followed by the value's
4375 history number. The way @code{print} labels its output is designed to
4376 remind you of this. Just @code{$} refers to the most recent value in
4377 the history, and @code{$$} refers to the value before that.
4378 @code{$$@var{n}} refers to the @var{n}th value from the end; @code{$$2}
4379 is the value just prior to @code{$$}, @code{$$1} is equivalent to
4380 @code{$$}, and @code{$$0} is equivalent to @code{$}.
4381
4382 For example, suppose you have just printed a pointer to a structure and
4383 want to see the contents of the structure. It suffices to type
4384
4385 @example
4386 p *$
4387 @end example
4388
4389 If you have a chain of structures where the component @code{next} points
4390 to the next one, you can print the contents of the next one with this:
4391
4392 @example
4393 p *$.next
4394 @end example
4395
4396 @noindent
4397 You can print successive links in the chain by repeating this
4398 command---which you can do by just typing @key{RET}.
4399
4400 Note that the history records values, not expressions. If the value of
4401 @code{x} is 4 and you type these commands:
4402
4403 @example
4404 print x
4405 set x=5
4406 @end example
4407
4408 @noindent
4409 then the value recorded in the value history by the @code{print} command
4410 remains 4 even though the value of @code{x} has changed.
4411
4412 @table @code
4413 @kindex show values
4414 @item show values
4415 Print the last ten values in the value history, with their item numbers.
4416 This is like @samp{p@ $$9} repeated ten times, except that @code{show
4417 values} does not change the history.
4418
4419 @item show values @var{n}
4420 Print ten history values centered on history item number @var{n}.
4421
4422 @item show values +
4423 Print ten history values just after the values last printed. If no more
4424 values are available, produces no display.
4425 @end table
4426
4427 Pressing @key{RET} to repeat @code{show values @var{n}} has exactly the
4428 same effect as @samp{show values +}.
4429
4430 @node Convenience Vars
4431 @section Convenience variables
4432
4433 @cindex convenience variables
4434 @value{GDBN} provides @dfn{convenience variables} that you can use within
4435 @value{GDBN} to hold on to a value and refer to it later. These variables
4436 exist entirely within @value{GDBN}; they are not part of your program, and
4437 setting a convenience variable has no direct effect on further execution
4438 of your program. That is why you can use them freely.
4439
4440 Convenience variables are prefixed with @samp{$}. Any name preceded by
4441 @samp{$} can be used for a convenience variable, unless it is one of
4442 the predefined machine-specific register names (@pxref{Registers}).
4443 (Value history references, in contrast, are @emph{numbers} preceded
4444 by @samp{$}. @xref{Value History, ,Value history}.)
4445
4446 You can save a value in a convenience variable with an assignment
4447 expression, just as you would set a variable in your program.
4448 For example:
4449
4450 @example
4451 set $foo = *object_ptr
4452 @end example
4453
4454 @noindent
4455 would save in @code{$foo} the value contained in the object pointed to by
4456 @code{object_ptr}.
4457
4458 Using a convenience variable for the first time creates it, but its
4459 value is @code{void} until you assign a new value. You can alter the
4460 value with another assignment at any time.
4461
4462 Convenience variables have no fixed types. You can assign a convenience
4463 variable any type of value, including structures and arrays, even if
4464 that variable already has a value of a different type. The convenience
4465 variable, when used as an expression, has the type of its current value.
4466
4467 @table @code
4468 @item show convenience
4469 @kindex show convenience
4470 Print a list of convenience variables used so far, and their values.
4471 Abbreviated @code{show con}.
4472 @end table
4473
4474 One of the ways to use a convenience variable is as a counter to be
4475 incremented or a pointer to be advanced. For example, to print
4476 a field from successive elements of an array of structures:
4477
4478 @example
4479 set $i = 0
4480 print bar[$i++]->contents
4481 @i{@dots{} repeat that command by typing @key{RET}.}
4482 @end example
4483
4484 Some convenience variables are created automatically by @value{GDBN} and given
4485 values likely to be useful.
4486
4487 @table @code
4488 @item $_
4489 @kindex $_
4490 The variable @code{$_} is automatically set by the @code{x} command to
4491 the last address examined (@pxref{Memory, ,Examining memory}). Other
4492 commands which provide a default address for @code{x} to examine also
4493 set @code{$_} to that address; these commands include @code{info line}
4494 and @code{info breakpoint}. The type of @code{$_} is @code{void *}
4495 except when set by the @code{x} command, in which case it is a pointer
4496 to the type of @code{$__}.
4497
4498 @item $__
4499 @kindex $__
4500 The variable @code{$__} is automatically set by the @code{x} command
4501 to the value found in the last address examined. Its type is chosen
4502 to match the format in which the data was printed.
4503 @end table
4504
4505 @node Registers
4506 @section Registers
4507
4508 @cindex registers
4509 You can refer to machine register contents, in expressions, as variables
4510 with names starting with @samp{$}. The names of registers are different
4511 for each machine; use @code{info registers} to see the names used on
4512 your machine.
4513
4514 @table @code
4515 @item info registers
4516 @kindex info registers
4517 Print the names and values of all registers except floating-point
4518 registers (in the selected stack frame).
4519
4520 @item info all-registers
4521 @kindex info all-registers
4522 @cindex floating point registers
4523 Print the names and values of all registers, including floating-point
4524 registers.
4525
4526 @item info registers @var{regname} @dots{}
4527 Print the relativized value of each specified register @var{regname}.
4528 @var{regname} may be any register name valid on the machine you are using, with
4529 or without the initial @samp{$}.
4530 @end table
4531
4532 @value{GDBN} has four ``standard'' register names that are available (in
4533 expressions) on most machines---whenever they do not conflict with an
4534 architecture's canonical mnemonics for registers. The register names
4535 @code{$pc} and @code{$sp} are used for the program counter register and
4536 the stack pointer. @code{$fp} is used for a register that contains a
4537 pointer to the current stack frame, and @code{$ps} is used for a
4538 register that contains the processor status. For example,
4539 you could print the program counter in hex with
4540
4541 @example
4542 p/x $pc
4543 @end example
4544
4545 @noindent
4546 or print the instruction to be executed next with
4547
4548 @example
4549 x/i $pc
4550 @end example
4551
4552 @noindent
4553 or add four to the stack pointer@footnote{This is a way of removing
4554 one word from the stack, on machines where stacks grow downward in
4555 memory (most machines, nowadays). This assumes that the innermost
4556 stack frame is selected; setting @code{$sp} is not allowed when other
4557 stack frames are selected. To pop entire frames off the stack,
4558 regardless of machine architecture, use @code{return};
4559 @pxref{Returning, ,Returning from a function}.} with
4560
4561 @example
4562 set $sp += 4
4563 @end example
4564
4565 Whenever possible, these four standard register names are available on
4566 your machine even though the machine has different canonical mnemonics,
4567 so long as there is no conflict. The @code{info registers} command
4568 shows the canonical names. For example, on the SPARC, @code{info
4569 registers} displays the processor status register as @code{$psr} but you
4570 can also refer to it as @code{$ps}.
4571
4572 @value{GDBN} always considers the contents of an ordinary register as an
4573 integer when the register is examined in this way. Some machines have
4574 special registers which can hold nothing but floating point; these
4575 registers are considered to have floating point values. There is no way
4576 to refer to the contents of an ordinary register as floating point value
4577 (although you can @emph{print} it as a floating point value with
4578 @samp{print/f $@var{regname}}).
4579
4580 Some registers have distinct ``raw'' and ``virtual'' data formats. This
4581 means that the data format in which the register contents are saved by
4582 the operating system is not the same one that your program normally
4583 sees. For example, the registers of the 68881 floating point
4584 coprocessor are always saved in ``extended'' (raw) format, but all C
4585 programs expect to work with ``double'' (virtual) format. In such
4586 cases, @value{GDBN} normally works with the virtual format only (the format that
4587 makes sense for your program), but the @code{info registers} command
4588 prints the data in both formats.
4589
4590 Normally, register values are relative to the selected stack frame
4591 (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a frame}). This means that you get the
4592 value that the register would contain if all stack frames farther in
4593 were exited and their saved registers restored. In order to see the
4594 true contents of hardware registers, you must select the innermost
4595 frame (with @samp{frame 0}).
4596
4597 However, @value{GDBN} must deduce where registers are saved, from the machine
4598 code generated by your compiler. If some registers are not saved, or if
4599 @value{GDBN} is unable to locate the saved registers, the selected stack
4600 frame will make no difference.
4601
4602 @ifset AMD29K
4603 @table @code
4604 @item set rstack_high_address @var{address}
4605 @kindex set rstack_high_address
4606 @cindex AMD 29K register stack
4607 @cindex register stack, AMD29K
4608 On AMD 29000 family processors, registers are saved in a separate
4609 ``register stack''. There is no way for @value{GDBN} to determine the extent
4610 of this stack. Normally, @value{GDBN} just assumes that the stack is ``large
4611 enough''. This may result in @value{GDBN} referencing memory locations that
4612 do not exist. If necessary, you can get around this problem by
4613 specifying the ending address of the register stack with the @code{set
4614 rstack_high_address} command. The argument should be an address, which
4615 you will probably want to precede with @samp{0x} to specify in
4616 hexadecimal.
4617
4618 @item show rstack_high_address
4619 @kindex show rstack_high_address
4620 Display the current limit of the register stack, on AMD 29000 family
4621 processors.
4622 @end table
4623 @end ifset
4624
4625 @ifclear HAVE-FLOAT
4626 @node Floating Point Hardware
4627 @section Floating point hardware
4628 @cindex floating point
4629
4630 @c FIXME! Really host, not target?
4631 Depending on the host machine architecture, @value{GDBN} may be able to give
4632 you more information about the status of the floating point hardware.
4633
4634 @table @code
4635 @item info float
4636 @kindex info float
4637 Display hardware-dependent information about the floating
4638 point unit. The exact contents and layout vary depending on the
4639 floating point chip; on some platforms, @samp{info float} is not
4640 available at all.
4641 @end table
4642 @c FIXME: this is a cop-out. Try to get examples, explanations. Only
4643 @c FIXME...supported currently on arm's and 386's. Mark properly with
4644 @c FIXME... m4 macros to isolate general statements from hardware-dep,
4645 @c FIXME... at that point.
4646 @end ifclear
4647
4648 @ifclear CONLY
4649 @node Languages
4650 @chapter Using @value{GDBN} with Different Languages
4651 @cindex languages
4652
4653 @ifset MOD2
4654 Although programming languages generally have common aspects, they are
4655 rarely expressed in the same manner. For instance, in ANSI C,
4656 dereferencing a pointer @code{p} is accomplished by @code{*p}, but in
4657 Modula-2, it is accomplished by @code{p^}. Values can also be
4658 represented (and displayed) differently. Hex numbers in C are written
4659 like @samp{0x1ae}, while in Modula-2 they appear as @samp{1AEH}.
4660 @end ifset
4661
4662 @cindex working language
4663 Language-specific information is built into @value{GDBN} for some languages,
4664 allowing you to express operations like the above in your program's
4665 native language, and allowing @value{GDBN} to output values in a manner
4666 consistent with the syntax of your program's native language. The
4667 language you use to build expressions, called the @dfn{working
4668 language}, can be selected manually, or @value{GDBN} can set it
4669 automatically.
4670
4671 @menu
4672 * Setting:: Switching between source languages
4673 * Show:: Displaying the language
4674 @ifset MOD2
4675 * Checks:: Type and range checks
4676 @end ifset
4677
4678 * Support:: Supported languages
4679 @end menu
4680
4681 @node Setting
4682 @section Switching between source languages
4683
4684 There are two ways to control the working language---either have @value{GDBN}
4685 set it automatically, or select it manually yourself. You can use the
4686 @code{set language} command for either purpose. On startup, @value{GDBN}
4687 defaults to setting the language automatically.
4688
4689 @menu
4690 * Manually:: Setting the working language manually
4691 * Automatically:: Having @value{GDBN} infer the source language
4692 @end menu
4693
4694 @node Manually
4695 @subsection Setting the working language
4696
4697 If you allow @value{GDBN} to set the language automatically,
4698 expressions are interpreted the same way in your debugging session and
4699 your program.
4700
4701 @kindex set language
4702 If you wish, you may set the language manually. To do this, issue the
4703 command @samp{set language @var{lang}}, where @var{lang} is the name of
4704 a language, such as
4705 @ifclear MOD2
4706 @code{c}.
4707 @end ifclear
4708 @ifset MOD2
4709 @code{c} or @code{modula-2}.
4710 @end ifset
4711 For a list of the supported languages, type @samp{set language}.
4712 @c FIXME: rms: eventually this command should be "help set language".
4713
4714 @ifset MOD2
4715 Setting the language manually prevents @value{GDBN} from updating the working
4716 language automatically. This can lead to confusion if you try
4717 to debug a program when the working language is not the same as the
4718 source language, when an expression is acceptable to both
4719 languages---but means different things. For instance, if the current
4720 source file were written in C, and @value{GDBN} was parsing Modula-2, a
4721 command such as:
4722
4723 @example
4724 print a = b + c
4725 @end example
4726
4727 @noindent
4728 might not have the effect you intended. In C, this means to add
4729 @code{b} and @code{c} and place the result in @code{a}. The result
4730 printed would be the value of @code{a}. In Modula-2, this means to compare
4731 @code{a} to the result of @code{b+c}, yielding a @code{BOOLEAN} value.
4732 @end ifset
4733
4734 @node Automatically
4735 @subsection Having @value{GDBN} infer the source language
4736
4737 To have @value{GDBN} set the working language automatically, use @samp{set
4738 language local} or @samp{set language auto}. @value{GDBN} then infers the
4739 language that a program was written in by looking at the name of its
4740 source files, and examining their extensions:
4741
4742 @table @file
4743 @ifset MOD2
4744 @item *.mod
4745 Modula-2 source file
4746 @end ifset
4747
4748 @item *.c
4749 C source file
4750
4751 @item *.C
4752 @itemx *.cc
4753 C++ source file
4754 @end table
4755
4756 This information is recorded for each function or procedure in a source
4757 file. When your program stops in a frame (usually by encountering a
4758 breakpoint), @value{GDBN} sets the working language to the language recorded
4759 for the function in that frame. If the language for a frame is unknown
4760 (that is, if the function or block corresponding to the frame was
4761 defined in a source file that does not have a recognized extension), the
4762 current working language is not changed, and @value{GDBN} issues a warning.
4763
4764 This may not seem necessary for most programs, which are written
4765 entirely in one source language. However, program modules and libraries
4766 written in one source language can be used by a main program written in
4767 a different source language. Using @samp{set language auto} in this
4768 case frees you from having to set the working language manually.
4769
4770 @node Show
4771 @section Displaying the language
4772
4773 The following commands will help you find out which language is the
4774 working language, and also what language source files were written in.
4775
4776 @kindex show language
4777 @kindex info frame
4778 @kindex info source
4779 @table @code
4780 @item show language
4781 Display the current working language. This is the
4782 language you can use with commands such as @code{print} to
4783 build and compute expressions that may involve variables in your program.
4784
4785 @item info frame
4786 Among the other information listed here (@pxref{Frame Info, ,Information
4787 about a frame}) is the source language for this frame. This is the
4788 language that will become the working language if you ever use an
4789 identifier that is in this frame.
4790
4791 @item info source
4792 Among the other information listed here (@pxref{Symbols, ,Examining the
4793 Symbol Table}) is the source language of this source file.
4794 @end table
4795
4796 @ifset MOD2
4797 @node Checks
4798 @section Type and range checking
4799
4800 @quotation
4801 @emph{Warning:} In this release, the @value{GDBN} commands for type and range
4802 checking are included, but they do not yet have any effect. This
4803 section documents the intended facilities.
4804 @end quotation
4805 @c FIXME remove warning when type/range code added
4806
4807 Some languages are designed to guard you against making seemingly common
4808 errors through a series of compile- and run-time checks. These include
4809 checking the type of arguments to functions and operators, and making
4810 sure mathematical overflows are caught at run time. Checks such as
4811 these help to ensure a program's correctness once it has been compiled
4812 by eliminating type mismatches, and providing active checks for range
4813 errors when your program is running.
4814
4815 @value{GDBN} can check for conditions like the above if you wish.
4816 Although @value{GDBN} will not check the statements in your program, it
4817 can check expressions entered directly into @value{GDBN} for evaluation via
4818 the @code{print} command, for example. As with the working language,
4819 @value{GDBN} can also decide whether or not to check automatically based on
4820 your program's source language. @xref{Support, ,Supported languages},
4821 for the default settings of supported languages.
4822
4823 @menu
4824 * Type Checking:: An overview of type checking
4825 * Range Checking:: An overview of range checking
4826 @end menu
4827
4828 @cindex type checking
4829 @cindex checks, type
4830 @node Type Checking
4831 @subsection An overview of type checking
4832
4833 Some languages, such as Modula-2, are strongly typed, meaning that the
4834 arguments to operators and functions have to be of the correct type,
4835 otherwise an error occurs. These checks prevent type mismatch
4836 errors from ever causing any run-time problems. For example,
4837
4838 @example
4839 1 + 2 @result{} 3
4840 @exdent but
4841 @error{} 1 + 2.3
4842 @end example
4843
4844 The second example fails because the @code{CARDINAL} 1 is not
4845 type-compatible with the @code{REAL} 2.3.
4846
4847 For expressions you use in @value{GDBN} commands, you can tell the @value{GDBN}
4848 type checker to skip checking; to treat any mismatches as errors and
4849 abandon the expression; or only issue warnings when type mismatches
4850 occur, but evaluate the expression anyway. When you choose the last of
4851 these, @value{GDBN} evaluates expressions like the second example above, but
4852 also issues a warning.
4853
4854 Even though you may turn type checking off, other type-based reasons may
4855 prevent @value{GDBN} from evaluating an expression. For instance, @value{GDBN} does not
4856 know how to add an @code{int} and a @code{struct foo}. These particular
4857 type errors have nothing to do with the language in use, and usually
4858 arise from expressions, such as the one described above, which make
4859 little sense to evaluate anyway.
4860
4861 Each language defines to what degree it is strict about type. For
4862 instance, both Modula-2 and C require the arguments to arithmetical
4863 operators to be numbers. In C, enumerated types and pointers can be
4864 represented as numbers, so that they are valid arguments to mathematical
4865 operators. @xref{Support, ,Supported languages}, for further
4866 details on specific languages.
4867
4868 @value{GDBN} provides some additional commands for controlling the type checker:
4869
4870 @kindex set check
4871 @kindex set check type
4872 @kindex show check type
4873 @table @code
4874 @item set check type auto
4875 Set type checking on or off based on the current working language.
4876 @xref{Support, ,Supported languages}, for the default settings for
4877 each language.
4878
4879 @item set check type on
4880 @itemx set check type off
4881 Set type checking on or off, overriding the default setting for the
4882 current working language. Issue a warning if the setting does not
4883 match the language default. If any type mismatches occur in
4884 evaluating an expression while typechecking is on, @value{GDBN} prints a
4885 message and aborts evaluation of the expression.
4886
4887 @item set check type warn
4888 Cause the type checker to issue warnings, but to always attempt to
4889 evaluate the expression. Evaluating the expression may still
4890 be impossible for other reasons. For example, @value{GDBN} cannot add
4891 numbers and structures.
4892
4893 @item show type
4894 Show the current setting of the type checker, and whether or not @value{GDBN} is
4895 setting it automatically.
4896 @end table
4897
4898 @cindex range checking
4899 @cindex checks, range
4900 @node Range Checking
4901 @subsection An overview of range checking
4902
4903 In some languages (such as Modula-2), it is an error to exceed the
4904 bounds of a type; this is enforced with run-time checks. Such range
4905 checking is meant to ensure program correctness by making sure
4906 computations do not overflow, or indices on an array element access do
4907 not exceed the bounds of the array.
4908
4909 For expressions you use in @value{GDBN} commands, you can tell
4910 @value{GDBN} to treat range errors in one of three ways: ignore them,
4911 always treat them as errors and abandon the expression, or issue
4912 warnings but evaluate the expression anyway.
4913
4914 A range error can result from numerical overflow, from exceeding an
4915 array index bound, or when you type a constant that is not a member
4916 of any type. Some languages, however, do not treat overflows as an
4917 error. In many implementations of C, mathematical overflow causes the
4918 result to ``wrap around'' to lower values---for example, if @var{m} is
4919 the largest integer value, and @var{s} is the smallest, then
4920
4921 @example
4922 @var{m} + 1 @result{} @var{s}
4923 @end example
4924
4925 This, too, is specific to individual languages, and in some cases
4926 specific to individual compilers or machines. @xref{Support, ,
4927 Supported languages}, for further details on specific languages.
4928
4929 @value{GDBN} provides some additional commands for controlling the range checker:
4930
4931 @kindex set check
4932 @kindex set check range
4933 @kindex show check range
4934 @table @code
4935 @item set check range auto
4936 Set range checking on or off based on the current working language.
4937 @xref{Support, ,Supported languages}, for the default settings for
4938 each language.
4939
4940 @item set check range on
4941 @itemx set check range off
4942 Set range checking on or off, overriding the default setting for the
4943 current working language. A warning is issued if the setting does not
4944 match the language default. If a range error occurs, then a message
4945 is printed and evaluation of the expression is aborted.
4946
4947 @item set check range warn
4948 Output messages when the @value{GDBN} range checker detects a range error,
4949 but attempt to evaluate the expression anyway. Evaluating the
4950 expression may still be impossible for other reasons, such as accessing
4951 memory that the process does not own (a typical example from many Unix
4952 systems).
4953
4954 @item show range
4955 Show the current setting of the range checker, and whether or not it is
4956 being set automatically by @value{GDBN}.
4957 @end table
4958 @end ifset
4959
4960 @node Support
4961 @section Supported languages
4962
4963 @ifset MOD2
4964 @value{GDBN} 4 supports C, C++, and Modula-2.
4965 @end ifset
4966 @ifclear MOD2
4967 @value{GDBN} 4 supports C, and C++.
4968 @end ifclear
4969 Some @value{GDBN} features may be used in expressions regardless of the
4970 language you use: the @value{GDBN} @code{@@} and @code{::} operators,
4971 and the @samp{@{type@}addr} construct (@pxref{Expressions,
4972 ,Expressions}) can be used with the constructs of any supported
4973 language.
4974
4975 The following sections detail to what degree each source language is
4976 supported by @value{GDBN}. These sections are not meant to be language
4977 tutorials or references, but serve only as a reference guide to what the
4978 @value{GDBN} expression parser will accept, and what input and output
4979 formats should look like for different languages. There are many good
4980 books written on each of these languages; please look to these for a
4981 language reference or tutorial.
4982
4983 @ifset MOD2
4984 @menu
4985 * C:: C and C++
4986 * Modula-2:: Modula-2
4987 @end menu
4988
4989 @node C
4990 @subsection C and C++
4991 @cindex C and C++
4992 @cindex expressions in C or C++
4993
4994 Since C and C++ are so closely related, many features of @value{GDBN} apply
4995 to both languages. Whenever this is the case, we discuss both languages
4996 together.
4997 @end ifset
4998 @ifclear MOD2
4999 @c Cancel this below, under same condition, at end of this chapter!
5000 @raisesections
5001 @end ifclear
5002
5003 @cindex C++
5004 @kindex g++
5005 @cindex GNU C++
5006 The C++ debugging facilities are jointly implemented by the GNU C++
5007 compiler and @value{GDBN}. Therefore, to debug your C++ code effectively,
5008 you must compile your C++ programs with the GNU C++ compiler,
5009 @code{g++}.
5010 @end ifclear
5011 @ifset CONLY
5012 @node C
5013 @chapter C Language Support
5014 @cindex C language
5015 @cindex expressions in C
5016
5017 Information specific to the C language is built into @value{GDBN} so that you
5018 can use C expressions while degugging. This also permits @value{GDBN} to
5019 output values in a manner consistent with C conventions.
5020
5021 @menu
5022 * C Operators:: C operators
5023 * C Constants:: C constants
5024 * Debugging C:: @value{GDBN} and C
5025 @end menu
5026 @end ifset
5027 @ifclear CONLY
5028 @menu
5029 * C Operators:: C and C++ operators
5030 * C Constants:: C and C++ constants
5031 * Cplus expressions:: C++ expressions
5032 * C Defaults:: Default settings for C and C++
5033 @ifset MOD2
5034 * C Checks:: C and C++ type and range checks
5035 @end ifset
5036
5037 * Debugging C:: @value{GDBN} and C
5038 * Debugging C plus plus:: Special features for C++
5039 @end menu
5040 @end ifclear
5041
5042 @ifclear CONLY
5043 @cindex C and C++ operators
5044 @node C Operators
5045 @subsubsection C and C++ operators
5046 @end ifclear
5047 @ifset CONLY
5048 @cindex C operators
5049 @node C Operators
5050 @section C operators
5051 @end ifset
5052
5053 Operators must be defined on values of specific types. For instance,
5054 @code{+} is defined on numbers, but not on structures. Operators are
5055 often defined on groups of types.
5056
5057 @ifclear CONLY
5058 For the purposes of C and C++, the following definitions hold:
5059 @end ifclear
5060
5061 @itemize @bullet
5062 @item
5063 @emph{Integral types} include @code{int} with any of its storage-class
5064 specifiers; @code{char}; and @code{enum}.
5065
5066 @item
5067 @emph{Floating-point types} include @code{float} and @code{double}.
5068
5069 @item
5070 @emph{Pointer types} include all types defined as @code{(@var{type}
5071 *)}.
5072
5073 @item
5074 @emph{Scalar types} include all of the above.
5075 @end itemize
5076
5077 @noindent
5078 The following operators are supported. They are listed here
5079 in order of increasing precedence:
5080
5081 @table @code
5082 @item ,
5083 The comma or sequencing operator. Expressions in a comma-separated list
5084 are evaluated from left to right, with the result of the entire
5085 expression being the last expression evaluated.
5086
5087 @item =
5088 Assignment. The value of an assignment expression is the value
5089 assigned. Defined on scalar types.
5090
5091 @item @var{op}=
5092 Used in an expression of the form @w{@code{@var{a} @var{op}= @var{b}}},
5093 and translated to @w{@code{@var{a} = @var{a op b}}}.
5094 @w{@code{@var{op}=}} and @code{=} have the same precendence.
5095 @var{op} is any one of the operators @code{|}, @code{^}, @code{&},
5096 @code{<<}, @code{>>}, @code{+}, @code{-}, @code{*}, @code{/}, @code{%}.
5097
5098 @item ?:
5099 The ternary operator. @code{@var{a} ? @var{b} : @var{c}} can be thought
5100 of as: if @var{a} then @var{b} else @var{c}. @var{a} should be of an
5101 integral type.
5102
5103 @item ||
5104 Logical @sc{or}. Defined on integral types.
5105
5106 @item &&
5107 Logical @sc{and}. Defined on integral types.
5108
5109 @item |
5110 Bitwise @sc{or}. Defined on integral types.
5111
5112 @item ^
5113 Bitwise exclusive-@sc{or}. Defined on integral types.
5114
5115 @item &
5116 Bitwise @sc{and}. Defined on integral types.
5117
5118 @item ==@r{, }!=
5119 Equality and inequality. Defined on scalar types. The value of these
5120 expressions is 0 for false and non-zero for true.
5121
5122 @item <@r{, }>@r{, }<=@r{, }>=
5123 Less than, greater than, less than or equal, greater than or equal.
5124 Defined on scalar types. The value of these expressions is 0 for false
5125 and non-zero for true.
5126
5127 @item <<@r{, }>>
5128 left shift, and right shift. Defined on integral types.
5129
5130 @item @@
5131 The @value{GDBN} ``artificial array'' operator (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}).
5132
5133 @item +@r{, }-
5134 Addition and subtraction. Defined on integral types, floating-point types and
5135 pointer types.
5136
5137 @item *@r{, }/@r{, }%
5138 Multiplication, division, and modulus. Multiplication and division are
5139 defined on integral and floating-point types. Modulus is defined on
5140 integral types.
5141
5142 @item ++@r{, }--
5143 Increment and decrement. When appearing before a variable, the
5144 operation is performed before the variable is used in an expression;
5145 when appearing after it, the variable's value is used before the
5146 operation takes place.
5147
5148 @item *
5149 Pointer dereferencing. Defined on pointer types. Same precedence as
5150 @code{++}.
5151
5152 @item &
5153 Address operator. Defined on variables. Same precedence as @code{++}.
5154
5155 @ifclear CONLY
5156 For debugging C++, @value{GDBN} implements a use of @samp{&} beyond what is
5157 allowed in the C++ language itself: you can use @samp{&(&@var{ref})}
5158 (or, if you prefer, simply @samp{&&@var{ref}}) to examine the address
5159 where a C++ reference variable (declared with @samp{&@var{ref}}) is
5160 stored.
5161 @end ifclear
5162
5163 @item -
5164 Negative. Defined on integral and floating-point types. Same
5165 precedence as @code{++}.
5166
5167 @item !
5168 Logical negation. Defined on integral types. Same precedence as
5169 @code{++}.
5170
5171 @item ~
5172 Bitwise complement operator. Defined on integral types. Same precedence as
5173 @code{++}.
5174
5175
5176 @item .@r{, }->
5177 Structure member, and pointer-to-structure member. For convenience,
5178 @value{GDBN} regards the two as equivalent, choosing whether to dereference a
5179 pointer based on the stored type information.
5180 Defined on @code{struct} and @code{union} data.
5181
5182 @item []
5183 Array indexing. @code{@var{a}[@var{i}]} is defined as
5184 @code{*(@var{a}+@var{i})}. Same precedence as @code{->}.
5185
5186 @item ()
5187 Function parameter list. Same precedence as @code{->}.
5188
5189 @ifclear CONLY
5190 @item ::
5191 C++ scope resolution operator. Defined on
5192 @code{struct}, @code{union}, and @code{class} types.
5193 @end ifclear
5194
5195 @item ::
5196 Doubled colons
5197 @ifclear CONLY
5198 also
5199 @end ifclear
5200 represent the @value{GDBN} scope operator (@pxref{Expressions,
5201 ,Expressions}).
5202 @ifclear CONLY
5203 Same precedence as @code{::}, above.
5204 @end ifclear
5205 @end table
5206
5207 @ifclear CONLY
5208 @cindex C and C++ constants
5209 @node C Constants
5210 @subsubsection C and C++ constants
5211
5212 @value{GDBN} allows you to express the constants of C and C++ in the
5213 following ways:
5214 @end ifclear
5215 @ifset CONLY
5216 @cindex C constants
5217 @node C Constants
5218 @section C constants
5219
5220 @value{GDBN} allows you to express the constants of C in the
5221 following ways:
5222 @end ifset
5223
5224 @itemize @bullet
5225 @item
5226 Integer constants are a sequence of digits. Octal constants are
5227 specified by a leading @samp{0} (ie. zero), and hexadecimal constants by
5228 a leading @samp{0x} or @samp{0X}. Constants may also end with a letter
5229 @samp{l}, specifying that the constant should be treated as a
5230 @code{long} value.
5231
5232 @item
5233 Floating point constants are a sequence of digits, followed by a decimal
5234 point, followed by a sequence of digits, and optionally followed by an
5235 exponent. An exponent is of the form:
5236 @samp{@w{e@r{[[}+@r{]|}-@r{]}@var{nnn}}}, where @var{nnn} is another
5237 sequence of digits. The @samp{+} is optional for positive exponents.
5238
5239 @item
5240 Enumerated constants consist of enumerated identifiers, or their
5241 integral equivalents.
5242
5243 @item
5244 Character constants are a single character surrounded by single quotes
5245 (@code{'}), or a number---the ordinal value of the corresponding character
5246 (usually its @sc{ASCII} value). Within quotes, the single character may
5247 be represented by a letter or by @dfn{escape sequences}, which are of
5248 the form @samp{\@var{nnn}}, where @var{nnn} is the octal representation
5249 of the character's ordinal value; or of the form @samp{\@var{x}}, where
5250 @samp{@var{x}} is a predefined special character---for example,
5251 @samp{\n} for newline.
5252
5253 @item
5254 String constants are a sequence of character constants surrounded
5255 by double quotes (@code{"}).
5256
5257 @item
5258 Pointer constants are an integral value. You can also write pointers
5259 to constants using the C operator @samp{&}.
5260
5261 @item
5262 Array constants are comma-separated lists surrounded by braces @samp{@{}
5263 and @samp{@}}; for example, @samp{@{1,2,3@}} is a three-element array of
5264 integers, @samp{@{@{1,2@}, @{3,4@}, @{5,6@}@}} is a three-by-two array,
5265 and @samp{@{&"hi", &"there", &"fred"@}} is a three-element array of pointers.
5266 @end itemize
5267
5268 @ifclear CONLY
5269 @node Cplus expressions
5270 @subsubsection C++ expressions
5271
5272 @cindex expressions in C++
5273 @value{GDBN} expression handling has a number of extensions to
5274 interpret a significant subset of C++ expressions.
5275
5276 @cindex C++ support, not in @sc{coff}
5277 @cindex @sc{coff} versus C++
5278 @cindex C++ and object formats
5279 @cindex object formats and C++
5280 @cindex a.out and C++
5281 @cindex @sc{ecoff} and C++
5282 @cindex @sc{xcoff} and C++
5283 @cindex @sc{elf}/stabs and C++
5284 @cindex @sc{elf}/@sc{dwarf} and C++
5285 @quotation
5286 @emph{Warning:} Most of these extensions depend on the use of additional
5287 debugging information in the symbol table, and thus require a rich,
5288 extendable object code format. In particular, if your system uses
5289 a.out, MIPS @sc{ecoff}, RS/6000 @sc{xcoff}, or Sun @sc{elf} with stabs
5290 extensions to the symbol table, these facilities are all available.
5291 Where the object code format is standard @sc{coff}, on the other hand,
5292 most of the C++ support in @value{GDBN} will @emph{not} work, nor can it.
5293 For the standard SVr4 debugging format, @sc{dwarf} in @sc{elf}, the
5294 standard is still evolving, so the C++ support in @value{GDBN} is still
5295 fragile; when this debugging format stabilizes, however, C++ support
5296 will also be available on systems that use it.
5297 @end quotation
5298
5299 @enumerate
5300
5301 @cindex member functions
5302 @item
5303 Member function calls are allowed; you can use expressions like
5304
5305 @example
5306 count = aml->GetOriginal(x, y)
5307 @end example
5308
5309 @kindex this
5310 @cindex namespace in C++
5311 @item
5312 While a member function is active (in the selected stack frame), your
5313 expressions have the same namespace available as the member function;
5314 that is, @value{GDBN} allows implicit references to the class instance
5315 pointer @code{this} following the same rules as C++.
5316
5317 @cindex call overloaded functions
5318 @cindex type conversions in C++
5319 @item
5320 You can call overloaded functions; @value{GDBN} will resolve the function
5321 call to the right definition, with one restriction---you must use
5322 arguments of the type required by the function that you want to call.
5323 @value{GDBN} will not perform conversions requiring constructors or
5324 user-defined type operators.
5325
5326 @cindex reference declarations
5327 @item
5328 @value{GDBN} understands variables declared as C++ references; you can use them in
5329 expressions just as you do in C++ source---they are automatically
5330 dereferenced.
5331
5332 In the parameter list shown when @value{GDBN} displays a frame, the values of
5333 reference variables are not displayed (unlike other variables); this
5334 avoids clutter, since references are often used for large structures.
5335 The @emph{address} of a reference variable is always shown, unless
5336 you have specified @samp{set print address off}.
5337
5338 @item
5339 @value{GDBN} supports the C++ name resolution operator @code{::}---your
5340 expressions can use it just as expressions in your program do. Since
5341 one scope may be defined in another, you can use @code{::} repeatedly if
5342 necessary, for example in an expression like
5343 @samp{@var{scope1}::@var{scope2}::@var{name}}. @value{GDBN} also allows
5344 resolving name scope by reference to source files, in both C and C++
5345 debugging (@pxref{Variables, ,Program variables}).
5346 @end enumerate
5347
5348 @node C Defaults
5349 @subsubsection C and C++ defaults
5350 @cindex C and C++ defaults
5351
5352 If you allow @value{GDBN} to set type and range checking automatically, they
5353 both default to @code{off} whenever the working language changes to
5354 C or C++. This happens regardless of whether you, or @value{GDBN},
5355 selected the working language.
5356
5357 If you allow @value{GDBN} to set the language automatically, it sets the
5358 working language to C or C++ on entering code compiled from a source file
5359 whose name ends with @file{.c}, @file{.C}, or @file{.cc}.
5360 @xref{Automatically, ,Having @value{GDBN} infer the source language}, for
5361 further details.
5362
5363 @ifset MOD2
5364 @c Type checking is (a) primarily motivated by Modula-2, and (b)
5365 @c unimplemented. If (b) changes, it might make sense to let this node
5366 @c appear even if Mod-2 does not, but meanwhile ignore it. pesch 16jul93.
5367 @node C Checks
5368 @subsubsection C and C++ type and range checks
5369 @cindex C and C++ checks
5370
5371 By default, when @value{GDBN} parses C or C++ expressions, type checking
5372 is not used. However, if you turn type checking on, @value{GDBN} will
5373 consider two variables type equivalent if:
5374
5375 @itemize @bullet
5376 @item
5377 The two variables are structured and have the same structure, union, or
5378 enumerated tag.
5379
5380 @item
5381 Two two variables have the same type name, or types that have been
5382 declared equivalent through @code{typedef}.
5383
5384 @ignore
5385 @c leaving this out because neither J Gilmore nor R Pesch understand it.
5386 @c FIXME--beers?
5387 @item
5388 The two @code{struct}, @code{union}, or @code{enum} variables are
5389 declared in the same declaration. (Note: this may not be true for all C
5390 compilers.)
5391 @end ignore
5392 @end itemize
5393
5394 Range checking, if turned on, is done on mathematical operations. Array
5395 indices are not checked, since they are often used to index a pointer
5396 that is not itself an array.
5397 @end ifset
5398 @end ifclear
5399
5400 @ifclear CONLY
5401 @node Debugging C
5402 @subsubsection @value{GDBN} and C
5403 @end ifclear
5404 @ifset CONLY
5405 @node Debugging C
5406 @section @value{GDBN} and C
5407 @end ifset
5408
5409 The @code{set print union} and @code{show print union} commands apply to
5410 the @code{union} type. When set to @samp{on}, any @code{union} that is
5411 inside a @code{struct}
5412 @ifclear CONLY
5413 or @code{class}
5414 @end ifclear
5415 will also be printed.
5416 Otherwise, it will appear as @samp{@{...@}}.
5417
5418 The @code{@@} operator aids in the debugging of dynamic arrays, formed
5419 with pointers and a memory allocation function. @xref{Expressions,
5420 ,Expressions}.
5421
5422 @ifclear CONLY
5423 @node Debugging C plus plus
5424 @subsubsection @value{GDBN} features for C++
5425
5426 @cindex commands for C++
5427 Some @value{GDBN} commands are particularly useful with C++, and some are
5428 designed specifically for use with C++. Here is a summary:
5429
5430 @table @code
5431 @cindex break in overloaded functions
5432 @item @r{breakpoint menus}
5433 When you want a breakpoint in a function whose name is overloaded,
5434 @value{GDBN} breakpoint menus help you specify which function definition
5435 you want. @xref{Breakpoint Menus,,Breakpoint menus}.
5436
5437 @cindex overloading in C++
5438 @item rbreak @var{regex}
5439 Setting breakpoints using regular expressions is helpful for setting
5440 breakpoints on overloaded functions that are not members of any special
5441 classes.
5442 @xref{Set Breaks, ,Setting breakpoints}.
5443
5444 @cindex C++ exception handling
5445 @item catch @var{exceptions}
5446 @itemx info catch
5447 Debug C++ exception handling using these commands. @xref{Exception
5448 Handling, ,Breakpoints and exceptions}.
5449
5450 @cindex inheritance
5451 @item ptype @var{typename}
5452 Print inheritance relationships as well as other information for type
5453 @var{typename}.
5454 @xref{Symbols, ,Examining the Symbol Table}.
5455
5456 @cindex C++ symbol display
5457 @item set print demangle
5458 @itemx show print demangle
5459 @itemx set print asm-demangle
5460 @itemx show print asm-demangle
5461 Control whether C++ symbols display in their source form, both when
5462 displaying code as C++ source and when displaying disassemblies.
5463 @xref{Print Settings, ,Print settings}.
5464
5465 @item set print object
5466 @itemx show print object
5467 Choose whether to print derived (actual) or declared types of objects.
5468 @xref{Print Settings, ,Print settings}.
5469
5470 @item set print vtbl
5471 @itemx show print vtbl
5472 Control the format for printing virtual function tables.
5473 @xref{Print Settings, ,Print settings}.
5474
5475 @item @r{Overloaded symbol names}
5476 You can specify a particular definition of an overloaded symbol, using
5477 the same notation that is used to declare such symbols in C++: type
5478 @code{@var{symbol}(@var{types})} rather than just @var{symbol}. You can
5479 also use the @value{GDBN} command-line word completion facilities to list the
5480 available choices, or to finish the type list for you.
5481 @xref{Completion,, Command completion}, for details on how to do this.
5482 @end table
5483 @ifclear MOD2
5484 @c cancels "raisesections" under same conditions near bgn of chapter
5485 @lowersections
5486 @end ifclear
5487
5488 @ifset MOD2
5489 @node Modula-2
5490 @subsection Modula-2
5491 @cindex Modula-2
5492
5493 The extensions made to @value{GDBN} to support Modula-2 only support
5494 output from the GNU Modula-2 compiler (which is currently being
5495 developed). Other Modula-2 compilers are not currently supported, and
5496 attempting to debug executables produced by them will most likely
5497 result in an error as @value{GDBN} reads in the executable's symbol
5498 table.
5499
5500 @cindex expressions in Modula-2
5501 @menu
5502 * M2 Operators:: Built-in operators
5503 * Built-In Func/Proc:: Built-in functions and procedures
5504 * M2 Constants:: Modula-2 constants
5505 * M2 Defaults:: Default settings for Modula-2
5506 * Deviations:: Deviations from standard Modula-2
5507 * M2 Checks:: Modula-2 type and range checks
5508 * M2 Scope:: The scope operators @code{::} and @code{.}
5509 * GDB/M2:: @value{GDBN} and Modula-2
5510 @end menu
5511
5512 @node M2 Operators
5513 @subsubsection Operators
5514 @cindex Modula-2 operators
5515
5516 Operators must be defined on values of specific types. For instance,
5517 @code{+} is defined on numbers, but not on structures. Operators are
5518 often defined on groups of types. For the purposes of Modula-2, the
5519 following definitions hold:
5520
5521 @itemize @bullet
5522
5523 @item
5524 @emph{Integral types} consist of @code{INTEGER}, @code{CARDINAL}, and
5525 their subranges.
5526
5527 @item
5528 @emph{Character types} consist of @code{CHAR} and its subranges.
5529
5530 @item
5531 @emph{Floating-point types} consist of @code{REAL}.
5532
5533 @item
5534 @emph{Pointer types} consist of anything declared as @code{POINTER TO
5535 @var{type}}.
5536
5537 @item
5538 @emph{Scalar types} consist of all of the above.
5539
5540 @item
5541 @emph{Set types} consist of @code{SET} and @code{BITSET} types.
5542
5543 @item
5544 @emph{Boolean types} consist of @code{BOOLEAN}.
5545 @end itemize
5546
5547 @noindent
5548 The following operators are supported, and appear in order of
5549 increasing precedence:
5550
5551 @table @code
5552 @item ,
5553 Function argument or array index separator.
5554
5555 @item :=
5556 Assignment. The value of @var{var} @code{:=} @var{value} is
5557 @var{value}.
5558
5559 @item <@r{, }>
5560 Less than, greater than on integral, floating-point, or enumerated
5561 types.
5562
5563 @item <=@r{, }>=
5564 Less than, greater than, less than or equal to, greater than or equal to
5565 on integral, floating-point and enumerated types, or set inclusion on
5566 set types. Same precedence as @code{<}.
5567
5568 @item =@r{, }<>@r{, }#
5569 Equality and two ways of expressing inequality, valid on scalar types.
5570 Same precedence as @code{<}. In @value{GDBN} scripts, only @code{<>} is
5571 available for inequality, since @code{#} conflicts with the script
5572 comment character.
5573
5574 @item IN
5575 Set membership. Defined on set types and the types of their members.
5576 Same precedence as @code{<}.
5577
5578 @item OR
5579 Boolean disjunction. Defined on boolean types.
5580
5581 @item AND@r{, }&
5582 Boolean conjuction. Defined on boolean types.
5583
5584 @item @@
5585 The @value{GDBN} ``artificial array'' operator (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}).
5586
5587 @item +@r{, }-
5588 Addition and subtraction on integral and floating-point types, or union
5589 and difference on set types.
5590
5591 @item *
5592 Multiplication on integral and floating-point types, or set intersection
5593 on set types.
5594
5595 @item /
5596 Division on floating-point types, or symmetric set difference on set
5597 types. Same precedence as @code{*}.
5598
5599 @item DIV@r{, }MOD
5600 Integer division and remainder. Defined on integral types. Same
5601 precedence as @code{*}.
5602
5603 @item -
5604 Negative. Defined on @code{INTEGER} and @code{REAL} data.
5605
5606 @item ^
5607 Pointer dereferencing. Defined on pointer types.
5608
5609 @item NOT
5610 Boolean negation. Defined on boolean types. Same precedence as
5611 @code{^}.
5612
5613 @item .
5614 @code{RECORD} field selector. Defined on @code{RECORD} data. Same
5615 precedence as @code{^}.
5616
5617 @item []
5618 Array indexing. Defined on @code{ARRAY} data. Same precedence as @code{^}.
5619
5620 @item ()
5621 Procedure argument list. Defined on @code{PROCEDURE} objects. Same precedence
5622 as @code{^}.
5623
5624 @item ::@r{, }.
5625 @value{GDBN} and Modula-2 scope operators.
5626 @end table
5627
5628 @quotation
5629 @emph{Warning:} Sets and their operations are not yet supported, so @value{GDBN}
5630 will treat the use of the operator @code{IN}, or the use of operators
5631 @code{+}, @code{-}, @code{*}, @code{/}, @code{=}, , @code{<>}, @code{#},
5632 @code{<=}, and @code{>=} on sets as an error.
5633 @end quotation
5634
5635 @cindex Modula-2 built-ins
5636 @node Built-In Func/Proc
5637 @subsubsection Built-in functions and procedures
5638
5639 Modula-2 also makes available several built-in procedures and functions.
5640 In describing these, the following metavariables are used:
5641
5642 @table @var
5643
5644 @item a
5645 represents an @code{ARRAY} variable.
5646
5647 @item c
5648 represents a @code{CHAR} constant or variable.
5649
5650 @item i
5651 represents a variable or constant of integral type.
5652
5653 @item m
5654 represents an identifier that belongs to a set. Generally used in the
5655 same function with the metavariable @var{s}. The type of @var{s} should
5656 be @code{SET OF @var{mtype}} (where @var{mtype} is the type of @var{m}).
5657
5658 @item n
5659 represents a variable or constant of integral or floating-point type.
5660
5661 @item r
5662 represents a variable or constant of floating-point type.
5663
5664 @item t
5665 represents a type.
5666
5667 @item v
5668 represents a variable.
5669
5670 @item x
5671 represents a variable or constant of one of many types. See the
5672 explanation of the function for details.
5673 @end table
5674
5675 All Modula-2 built-in procedures also return a result, described below.
5676
5677 @table @code
5678 @item ABS(@var{n})
5679 Returns the absolute value of @var{n}.
5680
5681 @item CAP(@var{c})
5682 If @var{c} is a lower case letter, it returns its upper case
5683 equivalent, otherwise it returns its argument
5684
5685 @item CHR(@var{i})
5686 Returns the character whose ordinal value is @var{i}.
5687
5688 @item DEC(@var{v})
5689 Decrements the value in the variable @var{v}. Returns the new value.
5690
5691 @item DEC(@var{v},@var{i})
5692 Decrements the value in the variable @var{v} by @var{i}. Returns the
5693 new value.
5694
5695 @item EXCL(@var{m},@var{s})
5696 Removes the element @var{m} from the set @var{s}. Returns the new
5697 set.
5698
5699 @item FLOAT(@var{i})
5700 Returns the floating point equivalent of the integer @var{i}.
5701
5702 @item HIGH(@var{a})
5703 Returns the index of the last member of @var{a}.
5704
5705 @item INC(@var{v})
5706 Increments the value in the variable @var{v}. Returns the new value.
5707
5708 @item INC(@var{v},@var{i})
5709 Increments the value in the variable @var{v} by @var{i}. Returns the
5710 new value.
5711
5712 @item INCL(@var{m},@var{s})
5713 Adds the element @var{m} to the set @var{s} if it is not already
5714 there. Returns the new set.
5715
5716 @item MAX(@var{t})
5717 Returns the maximum value of the type @var{t}.
5718
5719 @item MIN(@var{t})
5720 Returns the minimum value of the type @var{t}.
5721
5722 @item ODD(@var{i})
5723 Returns boolean TRUE if @var{i} is an odd number.
5724
5725 @item ORD(@var{x})
5726 Returns the ordinal value of its argument. For example, the ordinal
5727 value of a character is its ASCII value (on machines supporting the
5728 ASCII character set). @var{x} must be of an ordered type, which include
5729 integral, character and enumerated types.
5730
5731 @item SIZE(@var{x})
5732 Returns the size of its argument. @var{x} can be a variable or a type.
5733
5734 @item TRUNC(@var{r})
5735 Returns the integral part of @var{r}.
5736
5737 @item VAL(@var{t},@var{i})
5738 Returns the member of the type @var{t} whose ordinal value is @var{i}.
5739 @end table
5740
5741 @quotation
5742 @emph{Warning:} Sets and their operations are not yet supported, so
5743 @value{GDBN} will treat the use of procedures @code{INCL} and @code{EXCL} as
5744 an error.
5745 @end quotation
5746
5747 @cindex Modula-2 constants
5748 @node M2 Constants
5749 @subsubsection Constants
5750
5751 @value{GDBN} allows you to express the constants of Modula-2 in the following
5752 ways:
5753
5754 @itemize @bullet
5755
5756 @item
5757 Integer constants are simply a sequence of digits. When used in an
5758 expression, a constant is interpreted to be type-compatible with the
5759 rest of the expression. Hexadecimal integers are specified by a
5760 trailing @samp{H}, and octal integers by a trailing @samp{B}.
5761
5762 @item
5763 Floating point constants appear as a sequence of digits, followed by a
5764 decimal point and another sequence of digits. An optional exponent can
5765 then be specified, in the form @samp{E@r{[}+@r{|}-@r{]}@var{nnn}}, where
5766 @samp{@r{[}+@r{|}-@r{]}@var{nnn}} is the desired exponent. All of the
5767 digits of the floating point constant must be valid decimal (base 10)
5768 digits.
5769
5770 @item
5771 Character constants consist of a single character enclosed by a pair of
5772 like quotes, either single (@code{'}) or double (@code{"}). They may
5773 also be expressed by their ordinal value (their ASCII value, usually)
5774 followed by a @samp{C}.
5775
5776 @item
5777 String constants consist of a sequence of characters enclosed by a
5778 pair of like quotes, either single (@code{'}) or double (@code{"}).
5779 Escape sequences in the style of C are also allowed. @xref{C
5780 Constants, ,C and C++ constants}, for a brief explanation of escape
5781 sequences.
5782
5783 @item
5784 Enumerated constants consist of an enumerated identifier.
5785
5786 @item
5787 Boolean constants consist of the identifiers @code{TRUE} and
5788 @code{FALSE}.
5789
5790 @item
5791 Pointer constants consist of integral values only.
5792
5793 @item
5794 Set constants are not yet supported.
5795 @end itemize
5796
5797 @node M2 Defaults
5798 @subsubsection Modula-2 defaults
5799 @cindex Modula-2 defaults
5800
5801 If type and range checking are set automatically by @value{GDBN}, they
5802 both default to @code{on} whenever the working language changes to
5803 Modula-2. This happens regardless of whether you, or @value{GDBN},
5804 selected the working language.
5805
5806 If you allow @value{GDBN} to set the language automatically, then entering
5807 code compiled from a file whose name ends with @file{.mod} will set the
5808 working language to Modula-2. @xref{Automatically, ,Having @value{GDBN} set
5809 the language automatically}, for further details.
5810
5811 @node Deviations
5812 @subsubsection Deviations from standard Modula-2
5813 @cindex Modula-2, deviations from
5814
5815 A few changes have been made to make Modula-2 programs easier to debug.
5816 This is done primarily via loosening its type strictness:
5817
5818 @itemize @bullet
5819 @item
5820 Unlike in standard Modula-2, pointer constants can be formed by
5821 integers. This allows you to modify pointer variables during
5822 debugging. (In standard Modula-2, the actual address contained in a
5823 pointer variable is hidden from you; it can only be modified
5824 through direct assignment to another pointer variable or expression that
5825 returned a pointer.)
5826
5827 @item
5828 C escape sequences can be used in strings and characters to represent
5829 non-printable characters. @value{GDBN} will print out strings with these
5830 escape sequences embedded. Single non-printable characters are
5831 printed using the @samp{CHR(@var{nnn})} format.
5832
5833 @item
5834 The assignment operator (@code{:=}) returns the value of its right-hand
5835 argument.
5836
5837 @item
5838 All built-in procedures both modify @emph{and} return their argument.
5839 @end itemize
5840
5841 @node M2 Checks
5842 @subsubsection Modula-2 type and range checks
5843 @cindex Modula-2 checks
5844
5845 @quotation
5846 @emph{Warning:} in this release, @value{GDBN} does not yet perform type or
5847 range checking.
5848 @end quotation
5849 @c FIXME remove warning when type/range checks added
5850
5851 @value{GDBN} considers two Modula-2 variables type equivalent if:
5852
5853 @itemize @bullet
5854 @item
5855 They are of types that have been declared equivalent via a @code{TYPE
5856 @var{t1} = @var{t2}} statement
5857
5858 @item
5859 They have been declared on the same line. (Note: This is true of the
5860 GNU Modula-2 compiler, but it may not be true of other compilers.)
5861 @end itemize
5862
5863 As long as type checking is enabled, any attempt to combine variables
5864 whose types are not equivalent is an error.
5865
5866 Range checking is done on all mathematical operations, assignment, array
5867 index bounds, and all built-in functions and procedures.
5868
5869 @node M2 Scope
5870 @subsubsection The scope operators @code{::} and @code{.}
5871 @cindex scope
5872 @kindex .
5873 @cindex colon, doubled as scope operator
5874 @ifinfo
5875 @kindex colon-colon
5876 @c Info cannot handle :: but TeX can.
5877 @end ifinfo
5878 @iftex
5879 @kindex ::
5880 @end iftex
5881
5882 There are a few subtle differences between the Modula-2 scope operator
5883 (@code{.}) and the @value{GDBN} scope operator (@code{::}). The two have
5884 similar syntax:
5885
5886 @example
5887
5888 @var{module} . @var{id}
5889 @var{scope} :: @var{id}
5890 @end example
5891
5892 @noindent
5893 where @var{scope} is the name of a module or a procedure,
5894 @var{module} the name of a module, and @var{id} is any declared
5895 identifier within your program, except another module.
5896
5897 Using the @code{::} operator makes @value{GDBN} search the scope
5898 specified by @var{scope} for the identifier @var{id}. If it is not
5899 found in the specified scope, then @value{GDBN} will search all scopes
5900 enclosing the one specified by @var{scope}.
5901
5902 Using the @code{.} operator makes @value{GDBN} search the current scope for
5903 the identifier specified by @var{id} that was imported from the
5904 definition module specified by @var{module}. With this operator, it is
5905 an error if the identifier @var{id} was not imported from definition
5906 module @var{module}, or if @var{id} is not an identifier in
5907 @var{module}.
5908
5909 @node GDB/M2
5910 @subsubsection @value{GDBN} and Modula-2
5911
5912 Some @value{GDBN} commands have little use when debugging Modula-2 programs.
5913 Five subcommands of @code{set print} and @code{show print} apply
5914 specifically to C and C++: @samp{vtbl}, @samp{demangle},
5915 @samp{asm-demangle}, @samp{object}, and @samp{union}. The first four
5916 apply to C++, and the last to the C @code{union} type, which has no direct
5917 analogue in Modula-2.
5918
5919 The @code{@@} operator (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}), while available
5920 while using any language, is not useful with Modula-2. Its
5921 intent is to aid the debugging of @dfn{dynamic arrays}, which cannot be
5922 created in Modula-2 as they can in C or C++. However, because an
5923 address can be specified by an integral constant, the construct
5924 @samp{@{@var{type}@}@var{adrexp}} is still useful. (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions})
5925
5926 @cindex @code{#} in Modula-2
5927 In @value{GDBN} scripts, the Modula-2 inequality operator @code{#} is
5928 interpreted as the beginning of a comment. Use @code{<>} instead.
5929
5930 @end ifset
5931 @end ifclear
5932
5933 @node Symbols
5934 @chapter Examining the Symbol Table
5935
5936 The commands described in this section allow you to inquire about the
5937 symbols (names of variables, functions and types) defined in your
5938 program. This information is inherent in the text of your program and
5939 does not change as your program executes. @value{GDBN} finds it in your
5940 program's symbol table, in the file indicated when you started @value{GDBN}
5941 (@pxref{File Options, ,Choosing files}), or by one of the
5942 file-management commands (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to specify files}).
5943
5944 @c FIXME! This might be intentionally specific to C and C++; if so, move
5945 @c to someplace in C section of lang chapter.
5946 @cindex symbol names
5947 @cindex names of symbols
5948 @cindex quoting names
5949 Occasionally, you may need to refer to symbols that contain unusual
5950 characters, which @value{GDBN} ordinarily treats as word delimiters. The
5951 most frequent case is in referring to static variables in other
5952 source files (@pxref{Variables,,Program variables}). File names
5953 are recorded in object files as debugging symbols, but @value{GDBN} would
5954 ordinarily parse a typical file name, like @file{foo.c}, as the three words
5955 @samp{foo} @samp{.} @samp{c}. To allow @value{GDBN} to recognize
5956 @samp{foo.c} as a single symbol, enclose it in single quotes; for example,
5957
5958 @example
5959 p 'foo.c'::x
5960 @end example
5961
5962 @noindent
5963 looks up the value of @code{x} in the scope of the file @file{foo.c}.
5964
5965 @table @code
5966 @item info address @var{symbol}
5967 @kindex info address
5968 Describe where the data for @var{symbol} is stored. For a register
5969 variable, this says which register it is kept in. For a non-register
5970 local variable, this prints the stack-frame offset at which the variable
5971 is always stored.
5972
5973 Note the contrast with @samp{print &@var{symbol}}, which does not work
5974 at all for a register variable, and for a stack local variable prints
5975 the exact address of the current instantiation of the variable.
5976
5977 @item whatis @var{exp}
5978 @kindex whatis
5979 Print the data type of expression @var{exp}. @var{exp} is not
5980 actually evaluated, and any side-effecting operations (such as
5981 assignments or function calls) inside it do not take place.
5982 @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}.
5983
5984 @item whatis
5985 Print the data type of @code{$}, the last value in the value history.
5986
5987 @item ptype @var{typename}
5988 @kindex ptype
5989 Print a description of data type @var{typename}. @var{typename} may be
5990 the name of a type, or for C code it may have the form
5991 @ifclear CONLY
5992 @samp{class @var{class-name}},
5993 @end ifclear
5994 @samp{struct @var{struct-tag}}, @samp{union @var{union-tag}} or
5995 @samp{enum @var{enum-tag}}.
5996
5997 @item ptype @var{exp}
5998 @itemx ptype
5999 Print a description of the type of expression @var{exp}. @code{ptype}
6000 differs from @code{whatis} by printing a detailed description, instead
6001 of just the name of the type.
6002
6003 For example, for this variable declaration:
6004
6005 @example
6006 struct complex @{double real; double imag;@} v;
6007 @end example
6008
6009 @noindent
6010 the two commands give this output:
6011
6012 @example
6013 @group
6014 (@value{GDBP}) whatis v
6015 type = struct complex
6016 (@value{GDBP}) ptype v
6017 type = struct complex @{
6018 double real;
6019 double imag;
6020 @}
6021 @end group
6022 @end example
6023
6024 @noindent
6025 As with @code{whatis}, using @code{ptype} without an argument refers to
6026 the type of @code{$}, the last value in the value history.
6027
6028 @item info types @var{regexp}
6029 @itemx info types
6030 @kindex info types
6031 Print a brief description of all types whose name matches @var{regexp}
6032 (or all types in your program, if you supply no argument). Each
6033 complete typename is matched as though it were a complete line; thus,
6034 @samp{i type value} gives information on all types in your program whose
6035 name includes the string @code{value}, but @samp{i type ^value$} gives
6036 information only on types whose complete name is @code{value}.
6037
6038 This command differs from @code{ptype} in two ways: first, like
6039 @code{whatis}, it does not print a detailed description; second, it
6040 lists all source files where a type is defined.
6041
6042 @item info source
6043 @kindex info source
6044 Show the name of the current source file---that is, the source file for
6045 the function containing the current point of execution---and the language
6046 it was written in.
6047
6048 @item info sources
6049 @kindex info sources
6050 Print the names of all source files in your program for which there is
6051 debugging information, organized into two lists: files whose symbols
6052 have already been read, and files whose symbols will be read when needed.
6053
6054 @item info functions
6055 @kindex info functions
6056 Print the names and data types of all defined functions.
6057
6058 @item info functions @var{regexp}
6059 Print the names and data types of all defined functions
6060 whose names contain a match for regular expression @var{regexp}.
6061 Thus, @samp{info fun step} finds all functions whose names
6062 include @code{step}; @samp{info fun ^step} finds those whose names
6063 start with @code{step}.
6064
6065 @item info variables
6066 @kindex info variables
6067 Print the names and data types of all variables that are declared
6068 outside of functions (i.e., excluding local variables).
6069
6070 @item info variables @var{regexp}
6071 Print the names and data types of all variables (except for local
6072 variables) whose names contain a match for regular expression
6073 @var{regexp}.
6074
6075 @ignore
6076 This was never implemented.
6077 @item info methods
6078 @itemx info methods @var{regexp}
6079 @kindex info methods
6080 The @code{info methods} command permits the user to examine all defined
6081 methods within C++ program, or (with the @var{regexp} argument) a
6082 specific set of methods found in the various C++ classes. Many
6083 C++ classes provide a large number of methods. Thus, the output
6084 from the @code{ptype} command can be overwhelming and hard to use. The
6085 @code{info-methods} command filters the methods, printing only those
6086 which match the regular-expression @var{regexp}.
6087 @end ignore
6088
6089 @item maint print symbols @var{filename}
6090 @itemx maint print psymbols @var{filename}
6091 @itemx maint print msymbols @var{filename}
6092 @kindex maint print symbols
6093 @cindex symbol dump
6094 @kindex maint print psymbols
6095 @cindex partial symbol dump
6096 Write a dump of debugging symbol data into the file @var{filename}.
6097 These commands are used to debug the @value{GDBN} symbol-reading code. Only
6098 symbols with debugging data are included. If you use @samp{maint print
6099 symbols}, @value{GDBN} includes all the symbols for which it has already
6100 collected full details: that is, @var{filename} reflects symbols for
6101 only those files whose symbols @value{GDBN} has read. You can use the
6102 command @code{info sources} to find out which files these are. If you
6103 use @samp{maint print psymbols} instead, the dump shows information about
6104 symbols that @value{GDBN} only knows partially---that is, symbols defined in
6105 files that @value{GDBN} has skimmed, but not yet read completely. Finally,
6106 @samp{maint print msymbols} dumps just the minimal symbol information
6107 required for each object file from which @value{GDBN} has read some symbols.
6108 @xref{Files, ,Commands to specify files}, for a discussion of how
6109 @value{GDBN} reads symbols (in the description of @code{symbol-file}).
6110 @end table
6111
6112 @node Altering
6113 @chapter Altering Execution
6114
6115 Once you think you have found an error in your program, you might want to
6116 find out for certain whether correcting the apparent error would lead to
6117 correct results in the rest of the run. You can find the answer by
6118 experiment, using the @value{GDBN} features for altering execution of the
6119 program.
6120
6121 For example, you can store new values into variables or memory
6122 locations,
6123 @ifclear BARETARGET
6124 give your program a signal, restart it
6125 @end ifclear
6126 @ifset BARETARGET
6127 restart your program
6128 @end ifset
6129 at a different address, or even return prematurely from a function to
6130 its caller.
6131
6132 @menu
6133 * Assignment:: Assignment to variables
6134 * Jumping:: Continuing at a different address
6135 @ifclear BARETARGET
6136 * Signaling:: Giving your program a signal
6137 @end ifclear
6138
6139 * Returning:: Returning from a function
6140 * Calling:: Calling your program's functions
6141 * Patching:: Patching your program
6142 @end menu
6143
6144 @node Assignment
6145 @section Assignment to variables
6146
6147 @cindex assignment
6148 @cindex setting variables
6149 To alter the value of a variable, evaluate an assignment expression.
6150 @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}. For example,
6151
6152 @example
6153 print x=4
6154 @end example
6155
6156 @noindent
6157 stores the value 4 into the variable @code{x}, and then prints the
6158 value of the assignment expression (which is 4).
6159 @ifclear CONLY
6160 @xref{Languages, ,Using @value{GDBN} with Different Languages}, for more
6161 information on operators in supported languages.
6162 @end ifclear
6163
6164 @kindex set variable
6165 @cindex variables, setting
6166 If you are not interested in seeing the value of the assignment, use the
6167 @code{set} command instead of the @code{print} command. @code{set} is
6168 really the same as @code{print} except that the expression's value is
6169 not printed and is not put in the value history (@pxref{Value History,
6170 ,Value history}). The expression is evaluated only for its effects.
6171
6172 If the beginning of the argument string of the @code{set} command
6173 appears identical to a @code{set} subcommand, use the @code{set
6174 variable} command instead of just @code{set}. This command is identical
6175 to @code{set} except for its lack of subcommands. For example, if
6176 your program has a variable @code{width}, you get
6177 an error if you try to set a new value with just @samp{set width=13},
6178 because @value{GDBN} has the command @code{set width}:
6179
6180 @example
6181 (@value{GDBP}) whatis width
6182 type = double
6183 (@value{GDBP}) p width
6184 $4 = 13
6185 (@value{GDBP}) set width=47
6186 Invalid syntax in expression.
6187 @end example
6188
6189 @noindent
6190 The invalid expression, of course, is @samp{=47}. In
6191 order to actually set the program's variable @code{width}, use
6192
6193 @example
6194 (@value{GDBP}) set var width=47
6195 @end example
6196
6197 @value{GDBN} allows more implicit conversions in assignments than C; you can
6198 freely store an integer value into a pointer variable or vice versa,
6199 and you can convert any structure to any other structure that is the
6200 same length or shorter.
6201 @comment FIXME: how do structs align/pad in these conversions?
6202 @comment /pesch@cygnus.com 18dec1990
6203
6204 To store values into arbitrary places in memory, use the @samp{@{@dots{}@}}
6205 construct to generate a value of specified type at a specified address
6206 (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}). For example, @code{@{int@}0x83040} refers
6207 to memory location @code{0x83040} as an integer (which implies a certain size
6208 and representation in memory), and
6209
6210 @example
6211 set @{int@}0x83040 = 4
6212 @end example
6213
6214 @noindent
6215 stores the value 4 into that memory location.
6216
6217 @node Jumping
6218 @section Continuing at a different address
6219
6220 Ordinarily, when you continue your program, you do so at the place where
6221 it stopped, with the @code{continue} command. You can instead continue at
6222 an address of your own choosing, with the following commands:
6223
6224 @table @code
6225 @item jump @var{linespec}
6226 @kindex jump
6227 Resume execution at line @var{linespec}. Execution will stop
6228 immediately if there is a breakpoint there. @xref{List, ,Printing
6229 source lines}, for a description of the different forms of
6230 @var{linespec}.
6231
6232 The @code{jump} command does not change the current stack frame, or
6233 the stack pointer, or the contents of any memory location or any
6234 register other than the program counter. If line @var{linespec} is in
6235 a different function from the one currently executing, the results may
6236 be bizarre if the two functions expect different patterns of arguments or
6237 of local variables. For this reason, the @code{jump} command requests
6238 confirmation if the specified line is not in the function currently
6239 executing. However, even bizarre results are predictable if you are
6240 well acquainted with the machine-language code of your program.
6241
6242 @item jump *@var{address}
6243 Resume execution at the instruction at address @var{address}.
6244 @end table
6245
6246 You can get much the same effect as the @code{jump} command by storing a
6247 new value into the register @code{$pc}. The difference is that this
6248 does not start your program running; it only changes the address where it
6249 @emph{will} run when it is continued. For example,
6250
6251 @example
6252 set $pc = 0x485
6253 @end example
6254
6255 @noindent
6256 causes the next @code{continue} command or stepping command to execute at
6257 address @code{0x485}, rather than at the address where your program stopped.
6258 @xref{Continuing and Stepping, ,Continuing and stepping}.
6259
6260 The most common occasion to use the @code{jump} command is to back up,
6261 perhaps with more breakpoints set, over a portion of a program that has
6262 already executed, in order to examine its execution in more detail.
6263
6264 @ifclear BARETARGET
6265 @c @group
6266 @node Signaling
6267 @section Giving your program a signal
6268
6269 @table @code
6270 @item signal @var{signal}
6271 @kindex signal
6272 Resume execution where your program stopped, but immediately give it the
6273 signal @var{signal}. @var{signal} can be the name or the number of a
6274 signal. For example, on many systems @code{signal 2} and @code{signal
6275 SIGINT} are both ways of sending an interrupt signal.
6276
6277 Alternatively, if @var{signal} is zero, continue execution without
6278 giving a signal. This is useful when your program stopped on account of
6279 a signal and would ordinary see the signal when resumed with the
6280 @code{continue} command; @samp{signal 0} causes it to resume without a
6281 signal.
6282
6283 @code{signal} does not repeat when you press @key{RET} a second time
6284 after executing the command.
6285 @end table
6286 @c @end group
6287
6288 Invoking the @code{signal} command is not the same as invoking the
6289 @code{kill} utility from the shell. Sending a signal with @code{kill}
6290 causes @value{GDBN} to decide what to do with the signal depending on
6291 the signal handling tables (@pxref{Signals}). The @code{signal} command
6292 passes the signal directly to your program.
6293
6294 @end ifclear
6295
6296 @node Returning
6297 @section Returning from a function
6298
6299 @table @code
6300 @item return
6301 @itemx return @var{expression}
6302 @cindex returning from a function
6303 @kindex return
6304 You can cancel execution of a function call with the @code{return}
6305 command. If you give an
6306 @var{expression} argument, its value is used as the function's return
6307 value.
6308 @end table
6309
6310 When you use @code{return}, @value{GDBN} discards the selected stack frame
6311 (and all frames within it). You can think of this as making the
6312 discarded frame return prematurely. If you wish to specify a value to
6313 be returned, give that value as the argument to @code{return}.
6314
6315 This pops the selected stack frame (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a
6316 frame}), and any other frames inside of it, leaving its caller as the
6317 innermost remaining frame. That frame becomes selected. The
6318 specified value is stored in the registers used for returning values
6319 of functions.
6320
6321 The @code{return} command does not resume execution; it leaves the
6322 program stopped in the state that would exist if the function had just
6323 returned. In contrast, the @code{finish} command (@pxref{Continuing
6324 and Stepping, ,Continuing and stepping}) resumes execution until the
6325 selected stack frame returns naturally.
6326
6327 @node Calling
6328 @section Calling program functions
6329
6330 @cindex calling functions
6331 @kindex call
6332 @table @code
6333 @item call @var{expr}
6334 Evaluate the expression @var{expr} without displaying @code{void}
6335 returned values.
6336 @end table
6337
6338 You can use this variant of the @code{print} command if you want to
6339 execute a function from your program, but without cluttering the output
6340 with @code{void} returned values. The result is printed and saved in
6341 the value history, if it is not void.
6342
6343 @node Patching
6344 @section Patching programs
6345 @cindex patching binaries
6346 @cindex writing into executables
6347 @ifclear BARETARGET
6348 @cindex writing into corefiles
6349 @end ifclear
6350
6351 By default, @value{GDBN} opens the file containing your program's executable
6352 code
6353 @ifclear BARETARGET
6354 (or the corefile)
6355 @end ifclear
6356 read-only. This prevents accidental alterations
6357 to machine code; but it also prevents you from intentionally patching
6358 your program's binary.
6359
6360 If you'd like to be able to patch the binary, you can specify that
6361 explicitly with the @code{set write} command. For example, you might
6362 want to turn on internal debugging flags, or even to make emergency
6363 repairs.
6364
6365 @table @code
6366 @item set write on
6367 @itemx set write off
6368 @kindex set write
6369 If you specify @samp{set write on}, @value{GDBN} will open executable
6370 @ifclear BARETARGET
6371 and core
6372 @end ifclear
6373 files for both reading and writing; if you specify @samp{set write
6374 off} (the default), @value{GDBN} will open them read-only.
6375
6376 If you have already loaded a file, you must load it again (using the
6377 @code{exec-file}
6378 @ifclear BARETARGET
6379 or @code{core-file}
6380 @end ifclear
6381 command) after changing @code{set write}, for your new setting to take
6382 effect.
6383
6384 @item show write
6385 @kindex show write
6386 Display whether executable files
6387 @ifclear BARETARGET
6388 and core files
6389 @end ifclear
6390 will be opened for writing as well as reading.
6391 @end table
6392
6393 @node GDB Files
6394 @chapter @value{GDBN} Files
6395
6396 @value{GDBN} needs to know the file name of the program to be debugged, both in
6397 order to read its symbol table and in order to start your program.
6398 @ifclear BARETARGET
6399 To debug a core dump of a previous run, you must also tell @value{GDBN}
6400 the name of the core dump file.
6401 @end ifclear
6402
6403 @menu
6404 * Files:: Commands to specify files
6405 * Symbol Errors:: Errors reading symbol files
6406 @end menu
6407
6408 @node Files
6409 @section Commands to specify files
6410 @cindex symbol table
6411
6412 @ifclear BARETARGET
6413 @cindex core dump file
6414 The usual way to specify executable and core dump file names is with
6415 the command arguments given when you start @value{GDBN} (@pxref{Invocation,
6416 ,Getting In and Out of @value{GDBN}}.
6417 @end ifclear
6418 @ifset BARETARGET
6419 The usual way to specify an executable file name is with
6420 the command argument given when you start @value{GDBN}, (@pxref{Invocation,
6421 ,Getting In and Out of @value{GDBN}}.
6422 @end ifset
6423
6424 Occasionally it is necessary to change to a different file during a
6425 @value{GDBN} session. Or you may run @value{GDBN} and forget to specify
6426 a file you want to use. In these situations the @value{GDBN} commands
6427 to specify new files are useful.
6428
6429 @table @code
6430 @item file @var{filename}
6431 @cindex executable file
6432 @kindex file
6433 Use @var{filename} as the program to be debugged. It is read for its
6434 symbols and for the contents of pure memory. It is also the program
6435 executed when you use the @code{run} command. If you do not specify a
6436 directory and the file is not found in the @value{GDBN} working directory, @value{GDBN}
6437 uses the environment variable @code{PATH} as a list of directories to
6438 search, just as the shell does when looking for a program to run. You
6439 can change the value of this variable, for both @value{GDBN} and your program,
6440 using the @code{path} command.
6441
6442 On systems with memory-mapped files, an auxiliary symbol table file
6443 @file{@var{filename}.syms} may be available for @var{filename}. If it
6444 is, @value{GDBN} will map in the symbol table from
6445 @file{@var{filename}.syms}, starting up more quickly. See the
6446 descriptions of the options @samp{-mapped} and @samp{-readnow} (available
6447 on the command line, and with the commands @code{file}, @code{symbol-file},
6448 or @code{add-symbol-file}), for more information.
6449
6450 @item file
6451 @code{file} with no argument makes @value{GDBN} discard any information it
6452 has on both executable file and the symbol table.
6453
6454 @item exec-file @r{[} @var{filename} @r{]}
6455 @kindex exec-file
6456 Specify that the program to be run (but not the symbol table) is found
6457 in @var{filename}. @value{GDBN} will search the environment variable @code{PATH}
6458 if necessary to locate your program. Omitting @var{filename} means to
6459 discard information on the executable file.
6460
6461 @item symbol-file @r{[} @var{filename} @r{]}
6462 @kindex symbol-file
6463 Read symbol table information from file @var{filename}. @code{PATH} is
6464 searched when necessary. Use the @code{file} command to get both symbol
6465 table and program to run from the same file.
6466
6467 @code{symbol-file} with no argument clears out @value{GDBN} information on your
6468 program's symbol table.
6469
6470 The @code{symbol-file} command causes @value{GDBN} to forget the contents of its
6471 convenience variables, the value history, and all breakpoints and
6472 auto-display expressions. This is because they may contain pointers to
6473 the internal data recording symbols and data types, which are part of
6474 the old symbol table data being discarded inside @value{GDBN}.
6475
6476 @code{symbol-file} will not repeat if you press @key{RET} again after
6477 executing it once.
6478
6479 When @value{GDBN} is configured for a particular environment, it will
6480 understand debugging information in whatever format is the standard
6481 generated for that environment; you may use either a GNU compiler, or
6482 other compilers that adhere to the local conventions. Best results are
6483 usually obtained from GNU compilers; for example, using @code{@value{GCC}}
6484 you can generate debugging information for optimized code.
6485
6486 On some kinds of object files, the @code{symbol-file} command does not
6487 normally read the symbol table in full right away. Instead, it scans
6488 the symbol table quickly to find which source files and which symbols
6489 are present. The details are read later, one source file at a time,
6490 as they are needed.
6491
6492 The purpose of this two-stage reading strategy is to make @value{GDBN} start up
6493 faster. For the most part, it is invisible except for occasional
6494 pauses while the symbol table details for a particular source file are
6495 being read. (The @code{set verbose} command can turn these pauses
6496 into messages if desired. @xref{Messages/Warnings, ,Optional warnings
6497 and messages}.)
6498
6499 We have not implemented the two-stage strategy for COFF yet. When the
6500 symbol table is stored in COFF format, @code{symbol-file} reads the
6501 symbol table data in full right away.
6502
6503 @item symbol-file @var{filename} @r{[} -readnow @r{]} @r{[} -mapped @r{]}
6504 @itemx file @var{filename} @r{[} -readnow @r{]} @r{[} -mapped @r{]}
6505 @kindex readnow
6506 @cindex reading symbols immediately
6507 @cindex symbols, reading immediately
6508 @kindex mapped
6509 @cindex memory-mapped symbol file
6510 @cindex saving symbol table
6511 You can override the @value{GDBN} two-stage strategy for reading symbol
6512 tables by using the @samp{-readnow} option with any of the commands that
6513 load symbol table information, if you want to be sure @value{GDBN} has the
6514 entire symbol table available.
6515
6516 @ifclear BARETARGET
6517 If memory-mapped files are available on your system through the
6518 @code{mmap} system call, you can use another option, @samp{-mapped}, to
6519 cause @value{GDBN} to write the symbols for your program into a reusable
6520 file. Future @value{GDBN} debugging sessions will map in symbol information
6521 from this auxiliary symbol file (if the program has not changed), rather
6522 than spending time reading the symbol table from the executable
6523 program. Using the @samp{-mapped} option has the same effect as
6524 starting @value{GDBN} with the @samp{-mapped} command-line option.
6525
6526 You can use both options together, to make sure the auxiliary symbol
6527 file has all the symbol information for your program.
6528
6529 The auxiliary symbol file for a program called @var{myprog} is called
6530 @samp{@var{myprog}.syms}. Once this file exists (so long as it is newer
6531 than the corresponding executable), @value{GDBN} will always attempt to use
6532 it when you debug @var{myprog}; no special options or commands are
6533 needed.
6534
6535 The @file{.syms} file is specific to the host machine where you run
6536 @value{GDBN}. It holds an exact image of the internal @value{GDBN}
6537 symbol table. It cannot be shared across multiple host platforms.
6538
6539 @c FIXME: for now no mention of directories, since this seems to be in
6540 @c flux. 13mar1992 status is that in theory GDB would look either in
6541 @c current dir or in same dir as myprog; but issues like competing
6542 @c GDB's, or clutter in system dirs, mean that in practice right now
6543 @c only current dir is used. FFish says maybe a special GDB hierarchy
6544 @c (eg rooted in val of env var GDBSYMS) could exist for mappable symbol
6545 @c files.
6546
6547 @item core-file @r{[} @var{filename} @r{]}
6548 @kindex core
6549 @kindex core-file
6550 Specify the whereabouts of a core dump file to be used as the ``contents
6551 of memory''. Traditionally, core files contain only some parts of the
6552 address space of the process that generated them; @value{GDBN} can access the
6553 executable file itself for other parts.
6554
6555 @code{core-file} with no argument specifies that no core file is
6556 to be used.
6557
6558 Note that the core file is ignored when your program is actually running
6559 under @value{GDBN}. So, if you have been running your program and you wish to
6560 debug a core file instead, you must kill the subprocess in which the
6561 program is running. To do this, use the @code{kill} command
6562 (@pxref{Kill Process, ,Killing the child process}).
6563 @end ifclear
6564
6565 @item load @var{filename}
6566 @kindex load
6567 @ifset GENERIC
6568 Depending on what remote debugging facilities are configured into
6569 @value{GDBN}, the @code{load} command may be available. Where it exists, it
6570 is meant to make @var{filename} (an executable) available for debugging
6571 on the remote system---by downloading, or dynamic linking, for example.
6572 @code{load} also records the @var{filename} symbol table in @value{GDBN}, like
6573 the @code{add-symbol-file} command.
6574
6575 If your @value{GDBN} does not have a @code{load} command, attempting to
6576 execute it gets the error message ``@code{You can't do that when your
6577 target is @dots{}}''
6578 @end ifset
6579
6580 The file is loaded at whatever address is specified in the executable.
6581 For some object file formats, like a.out, the object file format fixes
6582 the address and so it won't necessarily match the address you gave to
6583 the linker.
6584
6585 @ifset VXWORKS
6586 On VxWorks, @code{load} will dynamically link @var{filename} on the
6587 current target system as well as adding its symbols in @value{GDBN}.
6588 @end ifset
6589
6590 @ifset I960
6591 @cindex download to Nindy-960
6592 With the Nindy interface to an Intel 960 board, @code{load} will
6593 download @var{filename} to the 960 as well as adding its symbols in
6594 @value{GDBN}.
6595 @end ifset
6596
6597 @ifset H8
6598 @cindex download to H8/300 or H8/500
6599 @cindex H8/300 or H8/500 download
6600 @cindex download to Hitachi SH
6601 @cindex Hitachi SH download
6602 When you select remote debugging to a Hitachi SH, H8/300, or H8/500 board
6603 (@pxref{Hitachi Remote,,@value{GDBN} and Hitachi Microprocessors}),
6604 the @code{load} command downloads your program to the Hitachi board and also
6605 opens it as the current executable target for @value{GDBN} on your host
6606 (like the @code{file} command).
6607 @end ifset
6608
6609 @code{load} will not repeat if you press @key{RET} again after using it.
6610
6611 @ifclear BARETARGET
6612 @item add-symbol-file @var{filename} @var{address}
6613 @itemx add-symbol-file @var{filename} @var{address} @r{[} -readnow @r{]} @r{[} -mapped @r{]}
6614 @kindex add-symbol-file
6615 @cindex dynamic linking
6616 The @code{add-symbol-file} command reads additional symbol table information
6617 from the file @var{filename}. You would use this command when @var{filename}
6618 has been dynamically loaded (by some other means) into the program that
6619 is running. @var{address} should be the memory address at which the
6620 file has been loaded; @value{GDBN} cannot figure this out for itself.
6621 You can specify @var{address} as an expression.
6622
6623 The symbol table of the file @var{filename} is added to the symbol table
6624 originally read with the @code{symbol-file} command. You can use the
6625 @code{add-symbol-file} command any number of times; the new symbol data thus
6626 read keeps adding to the old. To discard all old symbol data instead,
6627 use the @code{symbol-file} command.
6628
6629 @code{add-symbol-file} will not repeat if you press @key{RET} after using it.
6630
6631 You can use the @samp{-mapped} and @samp{-readnow} options just as with
6632 the @code{symbol-file} command, to change how @value{GDBN} manages the symbol
6633 table information for @var{filename}.
6634 @end ifclear
6635
6636 @item info files
6637 @itemx info target
6638 @kindex info files
6639 @kindex info target
6640 @code{info files} and @code{info target} are synonymous; both print
6641 the current target (@pxref{Targets, ,Specifying a Debugging Target}),
6642 including the
6643 @ifclear BARETARGET
6644 names of the executable and core dump files
6645 @end ifclear
6646 @ifset BARETARGET
6647 name of the executable file
6648 @end ifset
6649 currently in use by @value{GDBN}, and the files from which symbols were
6650 loaded. The command @code{help targets} lists all possible targets
6651 rather than current ones.
6652 @end table
6653
6654 All file-specifying commands allow both absolute and relative file names
6655 as arguments. @value{GDBN} always converts the file name to an absolute path
6656 name and remembers it that way.
6657
6658 @ifclear BARETARGET
6659 @cindex shared libraries
6660 @value{GDBN} supports SunOS, SVR4, and IBM RS/6000 shared libraries.
6661 @value{GDBN} automatically loads symbol definitions from shared libraries
6662 when you use the @code{run} command, or when you examine a core file.
6663 (Before you issue the @code{run} command, @value{GDBN} will not understand
6664 references to a function in a shared library, however---unless you are
6665 debugging a core file).
6666 @c FIXME: next @value{GDBN} release should permit some refs to undef
6667 @c FIXME...symbols---eg in a break cmd---assuming they are from a shared lib
6668
6669 @table @code
6670 @item info share
6671 @itemx info sharedlibrary
6672 @kindex info sharedlibrary
6673 @kindex info share
6674 Print the names of the shared libraries which are currently loaded.
6675
6676 @item sharedlibrary @var{regex}
6677 @itemx share @var{regex}
6678 @kindex sharedlibrary
6679 @kindex share
6680 This is an obsolescent command; you can use it to explicitly load shared
6681 object library symbols for files matching a Unix regular expression, but
6682 as with files loaded automatically, it will only load shared libraries
6683 required by your program for a core file or after typing @code{run}. If
6684 @var{regex} is omitted all shared libraries required by your program are
6685 loaded.
6686 @end table
6687 @end ifclear
6688
6689 @node Symbol Errors
6690 @section Errors reading symbol files
6691
6692 While reading a symbol file, @value{GDBN} will occasionally encounter problems,
6693 such as symbol types it does not recognize, or known bugs in compiler
6694 output. By default, @value{GDBN} does not notify you of such problems, since
6695 they are relatively common and primarily of interest to people
6696 debugging compilers. If you are interested in seeing information
6697 about ill-constructed symbol tables, you can either ask @value{GDBN} to print
6698 only one message about each such type of problem, no matter how many
6699 times the problem occurs; or you can ask @value{GDBN} to print more messages,
6700 to see how many times the problems occur, with the @code{set
6701 complaints} command (@pxref{Messages/Warnings, ,Optional warnings and
6702 messages}).
6703
6704 The messages currently printed, and their meanings, include:
6705
6706 @table @code
6707 @item inner block not inside outer block in @var{symbol}
6708
6709 The symbol information shows where symbol scopes begin and end
6710 (such as at the start of a function or a block of statements). This
6711 error indicates that an inner scope block is not fully contained
6712 in its outer scope blocks.
6713
6714 @value{GDBN} circumvents the problem by treating the inner block as if it had
6715 the same scope as the outer block. In the error message, @var{symbol}
6716 may be shown as ``@code{(don't know)}'' if the outer block is not a
6717 function.
6718
6719 @item block at @var{address} out of order
6720
6721 The symbol information for symbol scope blocks should occur in
6722 order of increasing addresses. This error indicates that it does not
6723 do so.
6724
6725 @value{GDBN} does not circumvent this problem, and will have trouble
6726 locating symbols in the source file whose symbols it is reading. (You
6727 can often determine what source file is affected by specifying
6728 @code{set verbose on}. @xref{Messages/Warnings, ,Optional warnings and
6729 messages}.)
6730
6731 @item bad block start address patched
6732
6733 The symbol information for a symbol scope block has a start address
6734 smaller than the address of the preceding source line. This is known
6735 to occur in the SunOS 4.1.1 (and earlier) C compiler.
6736
6737 @value{GDBN} circumvents the problem by treating the symbol scope block as
6738 starting on the previous source line.
6739
6740 @item bad string table offset in symbol @var{n}
6741
6742 @cindex foo
6743 Symbol number @var{n} contains a pointer into the string table which is
6744 larger than the size of the string table.
6745
6746 @value{GDBN} circumvents the problem by considering the symbol to have the
6747 name @code{foo}, which may cause other problems if many symbols end up
6748 with this name.
6749
6750 @item unknown symbol type @code{0x@var{nn}}
6751
6752 The symbol information contains new data types that @value{GDBN} does not yet
6753 know how to read. @code{0x@var{nn}} is the symbol type of the misunderstood
6754 information, in hexadecimal.
6755
6756 @value{GDBN} circumvents the error by ignoring this symbol information. This
6757 will usually allow your program to be debugged, though certain symbols
6758 will not be accessible. If you encounter such a problem and feel like
6759 debugging it, you can debug @code{@value{GDBP}} with itself, breakpoint on
6760 @code{complain}, then go up to the function @code{read_dbx_symtab} and
6761 examine @code{*bufp} to see the symbol.
6762
6763 @item stub type has NULL name
6764 @value{GDBN} could not find the full definition for
6765 @ifclear CONLY
6766 a struct or class.
6767 @end ifclear
6768 @ifset CONLY
6769 a struct.
6770 @end ifset
6771
6772 @ifclear CONLY
6773 @item const/volatile indicator missing (ok if using g++ v1.x), got@dots{}
6774
6775 The symbol information for a C++ member function is missing some
6776 information that recent versions of the compiler should have output
6777 for it.
6778 @end ifclear
6779
6780 @item info mismatch between compiler and debugger
6781
6782 @value{GDBN} could not parse a type specification output by the compiler.
6783 @end table
6784
6785 @node Targets
6786 @chapter Specifying a Debugging Target
6787 @cindex debugging target
6788 @kindex target
6789
6790 A @dfn{target} is the execution environment occupied by your program.
6791 @ifclear BARETARGET
6792 Often, @value{GDBN} runs in the same host environment as your program; in
6793 that case, the debugging target is specified as a side effect when you
6794 use the @code{file} or @code{core} commands. When you need more
6795 flexibility---for example, running @value{GDBN} on a physically separate
6796 host, or controlling a standalone system over a serial port or a
6797 realtime system over a TCP/IP connection---you
6798 @end ifclear
6799 @ifset BARETARGET
6800 You
6801 @end ifset
6802 can use the @code{target} command to specify one of the target types
6803 configured for @value{GDBN} (@pxref{Target Commands, ,Commands for managing
6804 targets}).
6805
6806 @menu
6807 * Active Targets:: Active targets
6808 * Target Commands:: Commands for managing targets
6809 * Remote:: Remote debugging
6810 @end menu
6811
6812 @node Active Targets
6813 @section Active targets
6814 @cindex stacking targets
6815 @cindex active targets
6816 @cindex multiple targets
6817
6818 @ifclear BARETARGET
6819 There are three classes of targets: processes, core files, and
6820 executable files. @value{GDBN} can work concurrently on up to three active
6821 targets, one in each class. This allows you to (for example) start a
6822 process and inspect its activity without abandoning your work on a core
6823 file.
6824
6825 For example, if you execute @samp{gdb a.out}, then the executable file
6826 @code{a.out} is the only active target. If you designate a core file as
6827 well---presumably from a prior run that crashed and coredumped---then
6828 @value{GDBN} has two active targets and will use them in tandem, looking
6829 first in the corefile target, then in the executable file, to satisfy
6830 requests for memory addresses. (Typically, these two classes of target
6831 are complementary, since core files contain only a program's
6832 read-write memory---variables and so on---plus machine status, while
6833 executable files contain only the program text and initialized data.)
6834 @end ifclear
6835
6836 When you type @code{run}, your executable file becomes an active process
6837 target as well. When a process target is active, all @value{GDBN} commands
6838 requesting memory addresses refer to that target; addresses in an
6839 @ifclear BARETARGET
6840 active core file or
6841 @end ifclear
6842 executable file target are obscured while the process
6843 target is active.
6844
6845 @ifset BARETARGET
6846 Use the @code{exec-file} command to select a
6847 new executable target (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to specify
6848 files}).
6849 @end ifset
6850 @ifclear BARETARGET
6851 Use the @code{core-file} and @code{exec-file} commands to select a
6852 new core file or executable target (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to specify
6853 files}). To specify as a target a process that is already running, use
6854 the @code{attach} command (@pxref{Attach, ,Debugging an
6855 already-running process}).
6856 @end ifclear
6857
6858 @node Target Commands
6859 @section Commands for managing targets
6860
6861 @table @code
6862 @item target @var{type} @var{parameters}
6863 Connects the @value{GDBN} host environment to a target
6864 @ifset BARETARGET
6865 machine.
6866 @end ifset
6867 @ifclear BARETARGET
6868 machine or process. A target is typically a protocol for talking to
6869 debugging facilities. You use the argument @var{type} to specify the
6870 type or protocol of the target machine.
6871
6872 Further @var{parameters} are interpreted by the target protocol, but
6873 typically include things like device names or host names to connect
6874 with, process numbers, and baud rates.
6875 @end ifclear
6876
6877 The @code{target} command will not repeat if you press @key{RET} again
6878 after executing the command.
6879
6880 @item help target
6881 @kindex help target
6882 Displays the names of all targets available. To display targets
6883 currently selected, use either @code{info target} or @code{info files}
6884 (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to specify files}).
6885
6886 @item help target @var{name}
6887 Describe a particular target, including any parameters necessary to
6888 select it.
6889 @end table
6890
6891 Here are some common targets (available, or not, depending on the GDB
6892 configuration):
6893
6894 @table @code
6895 @item target exec @var{program}
6896 @kindex target exec
6897 An executable file. @samp{target exec @var{program}} is the same as
6898 @samp{exec-file @var{program}}.
6899
6900 @ifclear BARETARGET
6901 @item target core @var{filename}
6902 @kindex target core
6903 A core dump file. @samp{target core @var{filename}} is the same as
6904 @samp{core-file @var{filename}}.
6905 @end ifclear
6906
6907 @ifset REMOTESTUB
6908 @item target remote @var{dev}
6909 @kindex target remote
6910 Remote serial target in GDB-specific protocol. The argument @var{dev}
6911 specifies what serial device to use for the connection (e.g.
6912 @file{/dev/ttya}). @xref{Remote, ,Remote debugging}.
6913 @end ifset
6914
6915 @ifset SIMS
6916 @item target sim
6917 @kindex target sim
6918 CPU simulator. @xref{Simulator,,Simulated CPU Target}.
6919 @end ifset
6920
6921 @ifset AMD29K
6922 @item target udi @var{keyword}
6923 @kindex target udi
6924 Remote AMD29K target, using the AMD UDI protocol. The @var{keyword}
6925 argument specifies which 29K board or simulator to use. @xref{UDI29K
6926 Remote,,@value{GDBN} and the UDI protocol for AMD29K}.
6927
6928 @item target amd-eb @var{dev} @var{speed} @var{PROG}
6929 @kindex target amd-eb
6930 @cindex AMD EB29K
6931 Remote PC-resident AMD EB29K board, attached over serial lines.
6932 @var{dev} is the serial device, as for @code{target remote};
6933 @var{speed} allows you to specify the linespeed; and @var{PROG} is the
6934 name of the program to be debugged, as it appears to DOS on the PC.
6935 @xref{EB29K Remote, ,@value{GDBN} with a remote EB29K}.
6936
6937 @end ifset
6938 @ifset H8
6939 @item target hms
6940 @kindex target hms
6941 A Hitachi SH, H8/300, or H8/500 board, attached via serial line to your host.
6942 @ifclear H8EXCLUSIVE
6943 @c Unix only, not currently of interest for H8-only manual
6944 Use special commands @code{device} and @code{speed} to control the serial
6945 line and the communications speed used.
6946 @end ifclear
6947 @xref{Hitachi Remote,,@value{GDBN} and Hitachi Microprocessors}.
6948
6949 @end ifset
6950 @ifset I960
6951 @item target nindy @var{devicename}
6952 @kindex target nindy
6953 An Intel 960 board controlled by a Nindy Monitor. @var{devicename} is
6954 the name of the serial device to use for the connection, e.g.
6955 @file{/dev/ttya}. @xref{i960-Nindy Remote, ,@value{GDBN} with a remote i960 (Nindy)}.
6956
6957 @end ifset
6958 @ifset ST2000
6959 @item target st2000 @var{dev} @var{speed}
6960 @kindex target st2000
6961 A Tandem ST2000 phone switch, running Tandem's STDBUG protocol. @var{dev}
6962 is the name of the device attached to the ST2000 serial line;
6963 @var{speed} is the communication line speed. The arguments are not used
6964 if @value{GDBN} is configured to connect to the ST2000 using TCP or Telnet.
6965 @xref{ST2000 Remote,,@value{GDBN} with a Tandem ST2000}.
6966
6967 @end ifset
6968 @ifset VXWORKS
6969 @item target vxworks @var{machinename}
6970 @kindex target vxworks
6971 A VxWorks system, attached via TCP/IP. The argument @var{machinename}
6972 is the target system's machine name or IP address.
6973 @xref{VxWorks Remote, ,@value{GDBN} and VxWorks}.
6974 @end ifset
6975 @end table
6976
6977 @ifset GENERIC
6978 Different targets are available on different configurations of @value{GDBN}; your
6979 configuration may have more or fewer targets.
6980 @end ifset
6981
6982 @node Remote
6983 @section Remote debugging
6984 @cindex remote debugging
6985
6986 If you are trying to debug a program running on a machine that cannot run
6987 GDB in the usual way, it is often useful to use remote debugging. For
6988 example, you might use remote debugging on an operating system kernel, or on
6989 a small system which does not have a general purpose operating system
6990 powerful enough to run a full-featured debugger.
6991
6992 Some configurations of GDB have special serial or TCP/IP interfaces
6993 to make this work with particular debugging targets. In addition,
6994 GDB comes with a generic serial protocol (specific to GDB, but
6995 not specific to any particular target system) which you can use if you
6996 write the remote stubs---the code that will run on the remote system to
6997 communicate with GDB.
6998
6999 Other remote targets may be available in your
7000 configuration of GDB; use @code{help targets} to list them.
7001
7002 @ifset GENERIC
7003 @c Text on starting up GDB in various specific cases; it goes up front
7004 @c in manuals configured for any of those particular situations, here
7005 @c otherwise.
7006 @menu
7007 @ifset REMOTESTUB
7008 * Remote Serial:: @value{GDBN} remote serial protocol
7009 @end ifset
7010 @ifset I960
7011 * i960-Nindy Remote:: @value{GDBN} with a remote i960 (Nindy)
7012 @end ifset
7013 @ifset AMD29K
7014 * UDI29K Remote:: @value{GDBN} and the UDI protocol for AMD29K
7015 * EB29K Remote:: @value{GDBN} with a remote EB29K
7016 @end ifset
7017 @ifset VXWORKS
7018 * VxWorks Remote:: @value{GDBN} and VxWorks
7019 @end ifset
7020 @ifset ST2000
7021 * ST2000 Remote:: @value{GDBN} with a Tandem ST2000
7022 @end ifset
7023 @ifset H8
7024 * Hitachi Remote:: @value{GDBN} and Hitachi Microprocessors
7025 @end ifset
7026 @ifset MIPS
7027 * MIPS Remote:: @value{GDBN} and MIPS boards
7028 @end ifset
7029 @ifset SIMS
7030 * Simulator:: Simulated CPU target
7031 @end ifset
7032 @end menu
7033
7034 @include remote.texi
7035 @end ifset
7036
7037 @node Controlling GDB
7038 @chapter Controlling @value{GDBN}
7039
7040 You can alter the way @value{GDBN} interacts with you by using
7041 the @code{set} command. For commands controlling how @value{GDBN} displays
7042 data, @pxref{Print Settings, ,Print settings}; other settings are described here.
7043
7044 @menu
7045 * Prompt:: Prompt
7046 * Editing:: Command editing
7047 * History:: Command history
7048 * Screen Size:: Screen size
7049 * Numbers:: Numbers
7050 * Messages/Warnings:: Optional warnings and messages
7051 @end menu
7052
7053 @node Prompt
7054 @section Prompt
7055 @cindex prompt
7056
7057 @value{GDBN} indicates its readiness to read a command by printing a string
7058 called the @dfn{prompt}. This string is normally @samp{(@value{GDBP})}. You
7059 can change the prompt string with the @code{set prompt} command. For
7060 instance, when debugging @value{GDBN} with @value{GDBN}, it is useful to change
7061 the prompt in one of the @value{GDBN} sessions so that you can always tell which
7062 one you are talking to.
7063
7064 @table @code
7065 @item set prompt @var{newprompt}
7066 @kindex set prompt
7067 Directs @value{GDBN} to use @var{newprompt} as its prompt string henceforth.
7068 @kindex show prompt
7069 @item show prompt
7070 Prints a line of the form: @samp{Gdb's prompt is: @var{your-prompt}}
7071 @end table
7072
7073 @node Editing
7074 @section Command editing
7075 @cindex readline
7076 @cindex command line editing
7077
7078 @value{GDBN} reads its input commands via the @dfn{readline} interface. This
7079 GNU library provides consistent behavior for programs which provide a
7080 command line interface to the user. Advantages are @code{emacs}-style
7081 or @code{vi}-style inline editing of commands, @code{csh}-like history
7082 substitution, and a storage and recall of command history across
7083 debugging sessions.
7084
7085 You may control the behavior of command line editing in @value{GDBN} with the
7086 command @code{set}.
7087
7088 @table @code
7089 @kindex set editing
7090 @cindex editing
7091 @item set editing
7092 @itemx set editing on
7093 Enable command line editing (enabled by default).
7094
7095 @item set editing off
7096 Disable command line editing.
7097
7098 @kindex show editing
7099 @item show editing
7100 Show whether command line editing is enabled.
7101 @end table
7102
7103 @node History
7104 @section Command history
7105
7106 @value{GDBN} can keep track of the commands you type during your
7107 debugging sessions, so that you can be certain of precisely what
7108 happened. Use these commands to manage the @value{GDBN} command
7109 history facility.
7110
7111 @table @code
7112 @cindex history substitution
7113 @cindex history file
7114 @kindex set history filename
7115 @item set history filename @var{fname}
7116 Set the name of the @value{GDBN} command history file to @var{fname}. This is
7117 the file from which @value{GDBN} will read an initial command history
7118 list or to which it will write this list when it exits. This list is
7119 accessed through history expansion or through the history
7120 command editing characters listed below. This file defaults to the
7121 value of the environment variable @code{GDBHISTFILE}, or to
7122 @file{./.gdb_history} if this variable is not set.
7123
7124 @cindex history save
7125 @kindex set history save
7126 @item set history save
7127 @itemx set history save on
7128 Record command history in a file, whose name may be specified with the
7129 @code{set history filename} command. By default, this option is disabled.
7130
7131 @item set history save off
7132 Stop recording command history in a file.
7133
7134 @cindex history size
7135 @kindex set history size
7136 @item set history size @var{size}
7137 Set the number of commands which @value{GDBN} will keep in its history list.
7138 This defaults to the value of the environment variable
7139 @code{HISTSIZE}, or to 256 if this variable is not set.
7140 @end table
7141
7142 @cindex history expansion
7143 History expansion assigns special meaning to the character @kbd{!}.
7144 @ifset have-readline-appendices
7145 @xref{Event Designators}.
7146 @end ifset
7147
7148 Since @kbd{!} is also the logical not operator in C, history expansion
7149 is off by default. If you decide to enable history expansion with the
7150 @code{set history expansion on} command, you may sometimes need to
7151 follow @kbd{!} (when it is used as logical not, in an expression) with
7152 a space or a tab to prevent it from being expanded. The readline
7153 history facilities will not attempt substitution on the strings
7154 @kbd{!=} and @kbd{!(}, even when history expansion is enabled.
7155
7156 The commands to control history expansion are:
7157
7158 @table @code
7159
7160 @kindex set history expansion
7161 @item set history expansion on
7162 @itemx set history expansion
7163 Enable history expansion. History expansion is off by default.
7164
7165 @item set history expansion off
7166 Disable history expansion.
7167
7168 The readline code comes with more complete documentation of
7169 editing and history expansion features. Users unfamiliar with @code{emacs}
7170 or @code{vi} may wish to read it.
7171 @ifset have-readline-appendices
7172 @xref{Command Line Editing}.
7173 @end ifset
7174
7175 @c @group
7176 @kindex show history
7177 @item show history
7178 @itemx show history filename
7179 @itemx show history save
7180 @itemx show history size
7181 @itemx show history expansion
7182 These commands display the state of the @value{GDBN} history parameters.
7183 @code{show history} by itself displays all four states.
7184 @c @end group
7185 @end table
7186
7187 @table @code
7188 @kindex show commands
7189 @item show commands
7190 Display the last ten commands in the command history.
7191
7192 @item show commands @var{n}
7193 Print ten commands centered on command number @var{n}.
7194
7195 @item show commands +
7196 Print ten commands just after the commands last printed.
7197 @end table
7198
7199 @node Screen Size
7200 @section Screen size
7201 @cindex size of screen
7202 @cindex pauses in output
7203
7204 Certain commands to @value{GDBN} may produce large amounts of
7205 information output to the screen. To help you read all of it,
7206 @value{GDBN} pauses and asks you for input at the end of each page of
7207 output. Type @key{RET} when you want to continue the output, or @kbd{q}
7208 to discard the remaining output. Also, the screen width setting
7209 determines when to wrap lines of output. Depending on what is being
7210 printed, @value{GDBN} tries to break the line at a readable place,
7211 rather than simply letting it overflow onto the following line.
7212
7213 Normally @value{GDBN} knows the size of the screen from the termcap data base
7214 together with the value of the @code{TERM} environment variable and the
7215 @code{stty rows} and @code{stty cols} settings. If this is not correct,
7216 you can override it with the @code{set height} and @code{set
7217 width} commands:
7218
7219 @table @code
7220 @item set height @var{lpp}
7221 @itemx show height
7222 @itemx set width @var{cpl}
7223 @itemx show width
7224 @kindex set height
7225 @kindex set width
7226 @kindex show width
7227 @kindex show height
7228 These @code{set} commands specify a screen height of @var{lpp} lines and
7229 a screen width of @var{cpl} characters. The associated @code{show}
7230 commands display the current settings.
7231
7232 If you specify a height of zero lines, @value{GDBN} will not pause during output
7233 no matter how long the output is. This is useful if output is to a file
7234 or to an editor buffer.
7235
7236 Likewise, you can specify @samp{set width 0} to prevent @value{GDBN}
7237 from wrapping its output.
7238 @end table
7239
7240 @node Numbers
7241 @section Numbers
7242 @cindex number representation
7243 @cindex entering numbers
7244
7245 You can always enter numbers in octal, decimal, or hexadecimal in @value{GDBN} by
7246 the usual conventions: octal numbers begin with @samp{0}, decimal
7247 numbers end with @samp{.}, and hexadecimal numbers begin with @samp{0x}.
7248 Numbers that begin with none of these are, by default, entered in base
7249 10; likewise, the default display for numbers---when no particular
7250 format is specified---is base 10. You can change the default base for
7251 both input and output with the @code{set radix} command.
7252
7253 @table @code
7254 @kindex set radix
7255 @item set radix @var{base}
7256 Set the default base for numeric input and display. Supported choices
7257 for @var{base} are decimal 8, 10, or 16. @var{base} must itself be
7258 specified either unambiguously or using the current default radix; for
7259 example, any of
7260
7261 @example
7262 set radix 012
7263 set radix 10.
7264 set radix 0xa
7265 @end example
7266
7267 @noindent
7268 will set the base to decimal. On the other hand, @samp{set radix 10}
7269 will leave the radix unchanged no matter what it was.
7270
7271 @kindex show radix
7272 @item show radix
7273 Display the current default base for numeric input and display.
7274 @end table
7275
7276 @node Messages/Warnings
7277 @section Optional warnings and messages
7278
7279 By default, @value{GDBN} is silent about its inner workings. If you are running
7280 on a slow machine, you may want to use the @code{set verbose} command.
7281 It will make @value{GDBN} tell you when it does a lengthy internal operation, so
7282 you will not think it has crashed.
7283
7284 Currently, the messages controlled by @code{set verbose} are those
7285 which announce that the symbol table for a source file is being read;
7286 see @code{symbol-file} in @ref{Files, ,Commands to specify files}.
7287
7288 @table @code
7289 @kindex set verbose
7290 @item set verbose on
7291 Enables @value{GDBN} output of certain informational messages.
7292
7293 @item set verbose off
7294 Disables @value{GDBN} output of certain informational messages.
7295
7296 @kindex show verbose
7297 @item show verbose
7298 Displays whether @code{set verbose} is on or off.
7299 @end table
7300
7301 By default, if @value{GDBN} encounters bugs in the symbol table of an object
7302 file, it is silent; but if you are debugging a compiler, you may find
7303 this information useful (@pxref{Symbol Errors, ,Errors reading symbol files}).
7304
7305 @table @code
7306 @kindex set complaints
7307 @item set complaints @var{limit}
7308 Permits @value{GDBN} to output @var{limit} complaints about each type of unusual
7309 symbols before becoming silent about the problem. Set @var{limit} to
7310 zero to suppress all complaints; set it to a large number to prevent
7311 complaints from being suppressed.
7312
7313 @kindex show complaints
7314 @item show complaints
7315 Displays how many symbol complaints @value{GDBN} is permitted to produce.
7316 @end table
7317
7318 By default, @value{GDBN} is cautious, and asks what sometimes seems to be a
7319 lot of stupid questions to confirm certain commands. For example, if
7320 you try to run a program which is already running:
7321
7322 @example
7323 (@value{GDBP}) run
7324 The program being debugged has been started already.
7325 Start it from the beginning? (y or n)
7326 @end example
7327
7328 If you are willing to unflinchingly face the consequences of your own
7329 commands, you can disable this ``feature'':
7330
7331 @table @code
7332 @kindex set confirm
7333 @cindex flinching
7334 @cindex confirmation
7335 @cindex stupid questions
7336 @item set confirm off
7337 Disables confirmation requests.
7338
7339 @item set confirm on
7340 Enables confirmation requests (the default).
7341
7342 @item show confirm
7343 @kindex show confirm
7344 Displays state of confirmation requests.
7345 @end table
7346
7347 @c FIXME this does not really belong here. But where *does* it belong?
7348 @cindex reloading symbols
7349 Some systems allow individual object files that make up your program to
7350 be replaced without stopping and restarting your program.
7351 @ifset VXWORKS
7352 For example, in VxWorks you can simply recompile a defective object file
7353 and keep on running.
7354 @end ifset
7355 If you are running on one of these systems, you can allow @value{GDBN} to
7356 reload the symbols for automatically relinked modules:
7357
7358 @table @code
7359 @kindex set symbol-reloading
7360 @item set symbol-reloading on
7361 Replace symbol definitions for the corresponding source file when an
7362 object file with a particular name is seen again.
7363
7364 @item set symbol-reloading off
7365 Do not replace symbol definitions when re-encountering object files of
7366 the same name. This is the default state; if you are not running on a
7367 system that permits automatically relinking modules, you should leave
7368 @code{symbol-reloading} off, since otherwise @value{GDBN} may discard symbols
7369 when linking large programs, that may contain several modules (from
7370 different directories or libraries) with the same name.
7371
7372 @item show symbol-reloading
7373 Show the current @code{on} or @code{off} setting.
7374 @end table
7375
7376 @node Sequences
7377 @chapter Canned Sequences of Commands
7378
7379 Aside from breakpoint commands (@pxref{Break Commands, ,Breakpoint
7380 command lists}), @value{GDBN} provides two ways to store sequences of commands
7381 for execution as a unit: user-defined commands and command files.
7382
7383 @menu
7384 * Define:: User-defined commands
7385 * Hooks:: User-defined command hooks
7386 * Command Files:: Command files
7387 * Output:: Commands for controlled output
7388 @end menu
7389
7390 @node Define
7391 @section User-defined commands
7392
7393 @cindex user-defined command
7394 A @dfn{user-defined command} is a sequence of @value{GDBN} commands to which you
7395 assign a new name as a command. This is done with the @code{define}
7396 command.
7397
7398 @table @code
7399 @item define @var{commandname}
7400 @kindex define
7401 Define a command named @var{commandname}. If there is already a command
7402 by that name, you are asked to confirm that you want to redefine it.
7403
7404 The definition of the command is made up of other @value{GDBN} command lines,
7405 which are given following the @code{define} command. The end of these
7406 commands is marked by a line containing @code{end}.
7407
7408 @item document @var{commandname}
7409 @kindex document
7410 Give documentation to the user-defined command @var{commandname}. The
7411 command @var{commandname} must already be defined. This command reads
7412 lines of documentation just as @code{define} reads the lines of the
7413 command definition, ending with @code{end}. After the @code{document}
7414 command is finished, @code{help} on command @var{commandname} will print
7415 the documentation you have specified.
7416
7417 You may use the @code{document} command again to change the
7418 documentation of a command. Redefining the command with @code{define}
7419 does not change the documentation.
7420
7421 @item help user-defined
7422 @kindex help user-defined
7423 List all user-defined commands, with the first line of the documentation
7424 (if any) for each.
7425
7426 @item show user
7427 @itemx show user @var{commandname}
7428 @kindex show user
7429 Display the @value{GDBN} commands used to define @var{commandname} (but not its
7430 documentation). If no @var{commandname} is given, display the
7431 definitions for all user-defined commands.
7432 @end table
7433
7434 User-defined commands do not take arguments. When they are executed, the
7435 commands of the definition are not printed. An error in any command
7436 stops execution of the user-defined command.
7437
7438 Commands that would ask for confirmation if used interactively proceed
7439 without asking when used inside a user-defined command. Many @value{GDBN} commands
7440 that normally print messages to say what they are doing omit the messages
7441 when used in a user-defined command.
7442
7443 @node Hooks
7444 @section User-defined command hooks
7445 @cindex command files
7446
7447 You may define @emph{hooks}, which are a special kind of user-defined
7448 command. Whenever you run the command @samp{foo}, if the user-defined
7449 command @samp{hook-foo} exists, it is executed (with no arguments)
7450 before that command.
7451
7452 In addition, a pseudo-command, @samp{stop} exists. Defining
7453 (@samp{hook-stop}) makes the associated commands execute every time
7454 execution stops in your program: before breakpoint commands are run,
7455 displays are printed, or the stack frame is printed.
7456
7457 @ifclear BARETARGET
7458 For example, to ignore @code{SIGALRM} signals while
7459 single-stepping, but treat them normally during normal execution,
7460 you could define:
7461
7462 @example
7463 define hook-stop
7464 handle SIGALRM nopass
7465 end
7466
7467 define hook-run
7468 handle SIGALRM pass
7469 end
7470
7471 define hook-continue
7472 handle SIGLARM pass
7473 end
7474 @end example
7475 @end ifclear
7476
7477 You can define a hook for any single-word command in @value{GDBN}, but
7478 not for command aliases; you should define a hook for the basic command
7479 name, e.g. @code{backtrace} rather than @code{bt}.
7480 @c FIXME! So how does Joe User discover whether a command is an alias
7481 @c or not?
7482 If an error occurs during the execution of your hook, execution of
7483 @value{GDBN} commands stops and @value{GDBN} issues a prompt
7484 (before the command that you actually typed had a chance to run).
7485
7486 If you try to define a hook which does not match any known command, you
7487 will get a warning from the @code{define} command.
7488
7489 @node Command Files
7490 @section Command files
7491
7492 @cindex command files
7493 A command file for @value{GDBN} is a file of lines that are @value{GDBN} commands. Comments
7494 (lines starting with @kbd{#}) may also be included. An empty line in a
7495 command file does nothing; it does not mean to repeat the last command, as
7496 it would from the terminal.
7497
7498 @cindex init file
7499 @cindex @file{@value{GDBINIT}}
7500 When you start @value{GDBN}, it automatically executes commands from its
7501 @dfn{init files}. These are files named @file{@value{GDBINIT}}. @value{GDBN} reads
7502 the init file (if any) in your home directory and then the init file
7503 (if any) in the current working directory. (The init files are not
7504 executed if you use the @samp{-nx} option; @pxref{Mode Options,
7505 ,Choosing modes}.)
7506
7507 @ifset GENERIC
7508 @cindex init file name
7509 On some configurations of @value{GDBN}, the init file is known by a
7510 different name (these are typically environments where a specialized
7511 form of GDB may need to coexist with other forms, hence a different name
7512 for the specialized version's init file). These are the environments
7513 with special init file names:
7514
7515 @itemize @bullet
7516 @kindex .vxgdbinit
7517 @item
7518 VxWorks (Wind River Systems real-time OS): @samp{.vxgdbinit}
7519
7520 @kindex .os68gdbinit
7521 @item
7522 OS68K (Enea Data Systems real-time OS): @samp{.os68gdbinit}
7523
7524 @kindex .esgdbinit
7525 @item
7526 ES-1800 (Ericsson Telecom AB M68000 emulator): @samp{.esgdbinit}
7527 @end itemize
7528 @end ifset
7529
7530 You can also request the execution of a command file with the
7531 @code{source} command:
7532
7533 @table @code
7534 @item source @var{filename}
7535 @kindex source
7536 Execute the command file @var{filename}.
7537 @end table
7538
7539 The lines in a command file are executed sequentially. They are not
7540 printed as they are executed. An error in any command terminates execution
7541 of the command file.
7542
7543 Commands that would ask for confirmation if used interactively proceed
7544 without asking when used in a command file. Many @value{GDBN} commands that
7545 normally print messages to say what they are doing omit the messages
7546 when called from command files.
7547
7548 @node Output
7549 @section Commands for controlled output
7550
7551 During the execution of a command file or a user-defined command, normal
7552 @value{GDBN} output is suppressed; the only output that appears is what is
7553 explicitly printed by the commands in the definition. This section
7554 describes three commands useful for generating exactly the output you
7555 want.
7556
7557 @table @code
7558 @item echo @var{text}
7559 @kindex echo
7560 @c I do not consider backslash-space a standard C escape sequence
7561 @c because it is not in ANSI.
7562 Print @var{text}. Nonprinting characters can be included in
7563 @var{text} using C escape sequences, such as @samp{\n} to print a
7564 newline. @strong{No newline will be printed unless you specify one.}
7565 In addition to the standard C escape sequences, a backslash followed
7566 by a space stands for a space. This is useful for displaying a
7567 string with spaces at the beginning or the end, since leading and
7568 trailing spaces are otherwise trimmed from all arguments.
7569 To print @samp{@w{ }and foo =@w{ }}, use the command
7570 @samp{echo \@w{ }and foo = \@w{ }}.
7571
7572 A backslash at the end of @var{text} can be used, as in C, to continue
7573 the command onto subsequent lines. For example,
7574
7575 @example
7576 echo This is some text\n\
7577 which is continued\n\
7578 onto several lines.\n
7579 @end example
7580
7581 produces the same output as
7582
7583 @example
7584 echo This is some text\n
7585 echo which is continued\n
7586 echo onto several lines.\n
7587 @end example
7588
7589 @item output @var{expression}
7590 @kindex output
7591 Print the value of @var{expression} and nothing but that value: no
7592 newlines, no @samp{$@var{nn} = }. The value is not entered in the
7593 value history either. @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}, for more information on
7594 expressions.
7595
7596 @item output/@var{fmt} @var{expression}
7597 Print the value of @var{expression} in format @var{fmt}. You can use
7598 the same formats as for @code{print}. @xref{Output Formats,,Output
7599 formats}, for more information.
7600
7601 @item printf @var{string}, @var{expressions}@dots{}
7602 @kindex printf
7603 Print the values of the @var{expressions} under the control of
7604 @var{string}. The @var{expressions} are separated by commas and may be
7605 either numbers or pointers. Their values are printed as specified by
7606 @var{string}, exactly as if your program were to execute the C
7607 subroutine
7608
7609 @example
7610 printf (@var{string}, @var{expressions}@dots{});
7611 @end example
7612
7613 For example, you can print two values in hex like this:
7614
7615 @smallexample
7616 printf "foo, bar-foo = 0x%x, 0x%x\n", foo, bar-foo
7617 @end smallexample
7618
7619 The only backslash-escape sequences that you can use in the format
7620 string are the simple ones that consist of backslash followed by a
7621 letter.
7622 @end table
7623
7624 @ifclear DOSHOST
7625 @node Emacs
7626 @chapter Using @value{GDBN} under GNU Emacs
7627
7628 @cindex emacs
7629 A special interface allows you to use GNU Emacs to view (and
7630 edit) the source files for the program you are debugging with
7631 @value{GDBN}.
7632
7633 To use this interface, use the command @kbd{M-x gdb} in Emacs. Give the
7634 executable file you want to debug as an argument. This command starts
7635 @value{GDBN} as a subprocess of Emacs, with input and output through a newly
7636 created Emacs buffer.
7637
7638 Using @value{GDBN} under Emacs is just like using @value{GDBN} normally except for two
7639 things:
7640
7641 @itemize @bullet
7642 @item
7643 All ``terminal'' input and output goes through the Emacs buffer.
7644 @end itemize
7645
7646 This applies both to @value{GDBN} commands and their output, and to the input
7647 and output done by the program you are debugging.
7648
7649 This is useful because it means that you can copy the text of previous
7650 commands and input them again; you can even use parts of the output
7651 in this way.
7652
7653 All the facilities of Emacs' Shell mode are available for interacting
7654 with your program. In particular, you can send signals the usual
7655 way---for example, @kbd{C-c C-c} for an interrupt, @kbd{C-c C-z} for a
7656 stop.
7657
7658 @itemize @bullet
7659 @item
7660 @value{GDBN} displays source code through Emacs.
7661 @end itemize
7662
7663 Each time @value{GDBN} displays a stack frame, Emacs automatically finds the
7664 source file for that frame and puts an arrow (@samp{=>}) at the
7665 left margin of the current line. Emacs uses a separate buffer for
7666 source display, and splits the screen to show both your @value{GDBN} session
7667 and the source.
7668
7669 Explicit @value{GDBN} @code{list} or search commands still produce output as
7670 usual, but you probably will have no reason to use them.
7671
7672 @quotation
7673 @emph{Warning:} If the directory where your program resides is not your
7674 current directory, it can be easy to confuse Emacs about the location of
7675 the source files, in which case the auxiliary display buffer will not
7676 appear to show your source. @value{GDBN} can find programs by searching your
7677 environment's @code{PATH} variable, so the @value{GDBN} input and output
7678 session will proceed normally; but Emacs does not get enough information
7679 back from @value{GDBN} to locate the source files in this situation. To
7680 avoid this problem, either start @value{GDBN} mode from the directory where
7681 your program resides, or specify a full path name when prompted for the
7682 @kbd{M-x gdb} argument.
7683
7684 A similar confusion can result if you use the @value{GDBN} @code{file} command to
7685 switch to debugging a program in some other location, from an existing
7686 @value{GDBN} buffer in Emacs.
7687 @end quotation
7688
7689 By default, @kbd{M-x gdb} calls the program called @file{gdb}. If
7690 you need to call @value{GDBN} by a different name (for example, if you keep
7691 several configurations around, with different names) you can set the
7692 Emacs variable @code{gdb-command-name}; for example,
7693
7694 @example
7695 (setq gdb-command-name "mygdb")
7696 @end example
7697
7698 @noindent
7699 (preceded by @kbd{ESC ESC}, or typed in the @code{*scratch*} buffer, or
7700 in your @file{.emacs} file) will make Emacs call the program named
7701 ``@code{mygdb}'' instead.
7702
7703 In the @value{GDBN} I/O buffer, you can use these special Emacs commands in
7704 addition to the standard Shell mode commands:
7705
7706 @table @kbd
7707 @item C-h m
7708 Describe the features of Emacs' @value{GDBN} Mode.
7709
7710 @item M-s
7711 Execute to another source line, like the @value{GDBN} @code{step} command; also
7712 update the display window to show the current file and location.
7713
7714 @item M-n
7715 Execute to next source line in this function, skipping all function
7716 calls, like the @value{GDBN} @code{next} command. Then update the display window
7717 to show the current file and location.
7718
7719 @item M-i
7720 Execute one instruction, like the @value{GDBN} @code{stepi} command; update
7721 display window accordingly.
7722
7723 @item M-x gdb-nexti
7724 Execute to next instruction, using the @value{GDBN} @code{nexti} command; update
7725 display window accordingly.
7726
7727 @item C-c C-f
7728 Execute until exit from the selected stack frame, like the @value{GDBN}
7729 @code{finish} command.
7730
7731 @item M-c
7732 Continue execution of your program, like the @value{GDBN} @code{continue}
7733 command.
7734
7735 @emph{Warning:} In Emacs v19, this command is @kbd{C-c C-p}.
7736
7737 @item M-u
7738 Go up the number of frames indicated by the numeric argument
7739 (@pxref{Arguments, , Numeric Arguments, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}),
7740 like the @value{GDBN} @code{up} command.
7741
7742 @emph{Warning:} In Emacs v19, this command is @kbd{C-c C-u}.
7743
7744 @item M-d
7745 Go down the number of frames indicated by the numeric argument, like the
7746 @value{GDBN} @code{down} command.
7747
7748 @emph{Warning:} In Emacs v19, this command is @kbd{C-c C-d}.
7749
7750 @item C-x &
7751 Read the number where the cursor is positioned, and insert it at the end
7752 of the @value{GDBN} I/O buffer. For example, if you wish to disassemble code
7753 around an address that was displayed earlier, type @kbd{disassemble};
7754 then move the cursor to the address display, and pick up the
7755 argument for @code{disassemble} by typing @kbd{C-x &}.
7756
7757 You can customize this further by defining elements of the list
7758 @code{gdb-print-command}; once it is defined, you can format or
7759 otherwise process numbers picked up by @kbd{C-x &} before they are
7760 inserted. A numeric argument to @kbd{C-x &} will both indicate that you
7761 wish special formatting, and act as an index to pick an element of the
7762 list. If the list element is a string, the number to be inserted is
7763 formatted using the Emacs function @code{format}; otherwise the number
7764 is passed as an argument to the corresponding list element.
7765 @end table
7766
7767 In any source file, the Emacs command @kbd{C-x SPC} (@code{gdb-break})
7768 tells @value{GDBN} to set a breakpoint on the source line point is on.
7769
7770 If you accidentally delete the source-display buffer, an easy way to get
7771 it back is to type the command @code{f} in the @value{GDBN} buffer, to
7772 request a frame display; when you run under Emacs, this will recreate
7773 the source buffer if necessary to show you the context of the current
7774 frame.
7775
7776 The source files displayed in Emacs are in ordinary Emacs buffers
7777 which are visiting the source files in the usual way. You can edit
7778 the files with these buffers if you wish; but keep in mind that @value{GDBN}
7779 communicates with Emacs in terms of line numbers. If you add or
7780 delete lines from the text, the line numbers that @value{GDBN} knows will cease
7781 to correspond properly with the code.
7782
7783 @c The following dropped because Epoch is nonstandard. Reactivate
7784 @c if/when v19 does something similar. ---pesch@cygnus.com 19dec1990
7785 @ignore
7786 @kindex emacs epoch environment
7787 @kindex epoch
7788 @kindex inspect
7789
7790 Version 18 of Emacs has a built-in window system called the @code{epoch}
7791 environment. Users of this environment can use a new command,
7792 @code{inspect} which performs identically to @code{print} except that
7793 each value is printed in its own window.
7794 @end ignore
7795 @end ifclear
7796
7797 @ifset LUCID
7798 @node Energize
7799 @chapter Using @value{GDBN} with Energize
7800
7801 @cindex Energize
7802 The Energize Programming System is an integrated development environment
7803 that includes a point-and-click interface to many programming tools.
7804 When you use @value{GDBN} in this environment, you can use the standard
7805 Energize graphical interface to drive @value{GDBN}; you can also, if you
7806 choose, type @value{GDBN} commands as usual in a debugging window. Even if
7807 you use the graphical interface, the debugging window (which uses Emacs,
7808 and resembles the standard Emacs interface to @value{GDBN}) displays the
7809 equivalent commands, so that the history of your debugging session is
7810 properly reflected.
7811
7812 When Energize starts up a @value{GDBN} session, it uses one of the
7813 command-line options @samp{-energize} or @samp{-cadillac} (``cadillac''
7814 is the name of the communications protocol used by the Energize system).
7815 This option makes @value{GDBN} run as one of the tools in the Energize Tool
7816 Set: it sends all output to the Energize kernel, and accept input from
7817 it as well.
7818
7819 See the user manual for the Energize Programming System for
7820 information on how to use the Energize graphical interface and the other
7821 development tools that Energize integrates with @value{GDBN}.
7822
7823 @end ifset
7824
7825 @node GDB Bugs
7826 @chapter Reporting Bugs in @value{GDBN}
7827 @cindex bugs in @value{GDBN}
7828 @cindex reporting bugs in @value{GDBN}
7829
7830 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @value{GDBN} reliable.
7831
7832 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it
7833 may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help
7834 the entire community by making the next version of @value{GDBN} work better. Bug
7835 reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @value{GDBN}.
7836
7837 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7838 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7839
7840 @menu
7841 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7842 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7843 @end menu
7844
7845 @node Bug Criteria
7846 @section Have you found a bug?
7847 @cindex bug criteria
7848
7849 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7850
7851 @itemize @bullet
7852 @item
7853 @cindex fatal signal
7854 @cindex debugger crash
7855 @cindex crash of debugger
7856 If the debugger gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7857 @value{GDBN} bug. Reliable debuggers never crash.
7858
7859 @item
7860 @cindex error on valid input
7861 If @value{GDBN} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7862
7863 @item
7864 @cindex invalid input
7865 If @value{GDBN} does not produce an error message for invalid input,
7866 that is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of
7867 ``invalid input'' might be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support
7868 for traditional practice''.
7869
7870 @item
7871 If you are an experienced user of debugging tools, your suggestions
7872 for improvement of @value{GDBN} are welcome in any case.
7873 @end itemize
7874
7875 @node Bug Reporting
7876 @section How to report bugs
7877 @cindex bug reports
7878 @cindex @value{GDBN} bugs, reporting
7879
7880 A number of companies and individuals offer support for GNU products.
7881 If you obtained @value{GDBN} from a support organization, we recommend you
7882 contact that organization first.
7883
7884 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7885 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the GNU Emacs
7886 distribution.
7887
7888 In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @value{GDBN} to one
7889 of these addresses:
7890
7891 @example
7892 bug-gdb@@prep.ai.mit.edu
7893 @{ucbvax|mit-eddie|uunet@}!prep.ai.mit.edu!bug-gdb
7894 @end example
7895
7896 @strong{Do not send bug reports to @samp{info-gdb}, or to
7897 @samp{help-gdb}, or to any newsgroups.} Most users of @value{GDBN} do not want to
7898 receive bug reports. Those that do, have arranged to receive @samp{bug-gdb}.
7899
7900 The mailing list @samp{bug-gdb} has a newsgroup @samp{gnu.gdb.bug} which
7901 serves as a repeater. The mailing list and the newsgroup carry exactly
7902 the same messages. Often people think of posting bug reports to the
7903 newsgroup instead of mailing them. This appears to work, but it has one
7904 problem which can be crucial: a newsgroup posting often lacks a mail
7905 path back to the sender. Thus, if we need to ask for more information,
7906 we may be unable to reach you. For this reason, it is better to send
7907 bug reports to the mailing list.
7908
7909 As a last resort, send bug reports on paper to:
7910
7911 @example
7912 GNU Debugger Bugs
7913 Free Software Foundation
7914 545 Tech Square
7915 Cambridge, MA 02139
7916 @end example
7917
7918 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7919 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7920 fact or leave it out, state it!
7921
7922 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7923 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
7924 assume that the name of the variable you use in an example does not matter.
7925 Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a
7926 stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the location where that
7927 name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name were different, the contents
7928 of that location would fool the debugger into doing the right thing despite
7929 the bug. Play it safe and give a specific, complete example. That is the
7930 easiest thing for you to do, and the most helpful.
7931
7932 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7933 the bug if it is new to us. It is not as important as what happens if
7934 the bug is already known. Therefore, always write your bug reports on
7935 the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
7936
7937 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7938 bell?'' Those bug reports are useless, and we urge everyone to
7939 @emph{refuse to respond to them} except to chide the sender to report
7940 bugs properly.
7941
7942 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7943
7944 @itemize @bullet
7945 @item
7946 The version of @value{GDBN}. @value{GDBN} announces it if you start with no
7947 arguments; you can also print it at any time using @code{show version}.
7948
7949 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7950 the bug in the current version of @value{GDBN}.
7951
7952 @item
7953 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7954 version number.
7955
7956 @item
7957 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @value{GDBN}---e.g.
7958 ``@value{GCC}--2.0''.
7959
7960 @item
7961 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile the program you
7962 are debugging---e.g. ``@value{GCC}--2.0''.
7963
7964 @item
7965 The command arguments you gave the compiler to compile your example and
7966 observe the bug. For example, did you use @samp{-O}? To guarantee
7967 you will not omit something important, list them all. A copy of the
7968 Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
7969
7970 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7971 and then we might not encounter the bug.
7972
7973 @item
7974 A complete input script, and all necessary source files, that will
7975 reproduce the bug.
7976
7977 @item
7978 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7979 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7980
7981 Of course, if the bug is that @value{GDBN} gets a fatal signal, then we will
7982 certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
7983 notice unless it is glaringly wrong. We are human, after all. You
7984 might as well not give us a chance to make a mistake.
7985
7986 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7987 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as,
7988 your copy of @value{GDBN} is out of synch, or you have encountered a
7989 bug in the C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy
7990 might crash and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash,
7991 then when ours fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not
7992 happening for us. If you had not told us to expect a crash, then we
7993 would not be able to draw any conclusion from our observations.
7994
7995 @item
7996 If you wish to suggest changes to the @value{GDBN} source, send us context
7997 diffs. If you even discuss something in the @value{GDBN} source, refer to
7998 it by context, not by line number.
7999
8000 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8001 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8002 @end itemize
8003
8004 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8005
8006 @itemize @bullet
8007 @item
8008 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8009
8010 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8011 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8012 changes will not affect it.
8013
8014 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8015 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8016 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8017 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8018
8019 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8020 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8021 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8022 less time, etc.
8023
8024 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8025 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8026
8027 @item
8028 A patch for the bug.
8029
8030 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8031 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8032 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8033 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8034
8035 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @value{GDBN} it is very hard to
8036 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8037 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able
8038 to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
8039
8040 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8041 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8042 help us to understand.
8043
8044 @item
8045 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8046
8047 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8048 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8049 @end itemize
8050
8051 @c The readline documentation is distributed with the readline code
8052 @c and consists of the two following files:
8053 @c rluser.texinfo
8054 @c inc-hist.texi
8055 @c Use -I with makeinfo to point to the appropriate directory,
8056 @c environment var TEXINPUTS with TeX.
8057 @include rluser.texinfo
8058 @include inc-hist.texi
8059
8060 @ifset NOVEL
8061 @node Renamed Commands
8062 @appendix Renamed Commands
8063
8064 The following commands were renamed in GDB 4, in order to make the
8065 command set as a whole more consistent and easier to use and remember:
8066
8067 @kindex add-syms
8068 @kindex delete environment
8069 @kindex info copying
8070 @kindex info convenience
8071 @kindex info directories
8072 @kindex info editing
8073 @kindex info history
8074 @kindex info targets
8075 @kindex info values
8076 @kindex info version
8077 @kindex info warranty
8078 @kindex set addressprint
8079 @kindex set arrayprint
8080 @kindex set prettyprint
8081 @kindex set screen-height
8082 @kindex set screen-width
8083 @kindex set unionprint
8084 @kindex set vtblprint
8085 @kindex set demangle
8086 @kindex set asm-demangle
8087 @kindex set sevenbit-strings
8088 @kindex set array-max
8089 @kindex set caution
8090 @kindex set history write
8091 @kindex show addressprint
8092 @kindex show arrayprint
8093 @kindex show prettyprint
8094 @kindex show screen-height
8095 @kindex show screen-width
8096 @kindex show unionprint
8097 @kindex show vtblprint
8098 @kindex show demangle
8099 @kindex show asm-demangle
8100 @kindex show sevenbit-strings
8101 @kindex show array-max
8102 @kindex show caution
8103 @kindex show history write
8104 @kindex unset
8105
8106 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8107 @ifinfo
8108 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8109 @example
8110 OLD COMMAND NEW COMMAND
8111 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8112 --------------- -------------------------------
8113 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8114 add-syms add-symbol-file
8115 delete environment unset environment
8116 info convenience show convenience
8117 info copying show copying
8118 info directories show directories
8119 info editing show commands
8120 info history show values
8121 info targets help target
8122 info values show values
8123 info version show version
8124 info warranty show warranty
8125 set/show addressprint set/show print address
8126 set/show array-max set/show print elements
8127 set/show arrayprint set/show print array
8128 set/show asm-demangle set/show print asm-demangle
8129 set/show caution set/show confirm
8130 set/show demangle set/show print demangle
8131 set/show history write set/show history save
8132 set/show prettyprint set/show print pretty
8133 set/show screen-height set/show height
8134 set/show screen-width set/show width
8135 set/show sevenbit-strings set/show print sevenbit-strings
8136 set/show unionprint set/show print union
8137 set/show vtblprint set/show print vtbl
8138
8139 unset [No longer an alias for delete]
8140 @end example
8141 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8142 @end ifinfo
8143
8144 @tex
8145 \vskip \parskip\vskip \baselineskip
8146 \halign{\tt #\hfil &\qquad#&\tt #\hfil\cr
8147 {\bf Old Command} &&{\bf New Command}\cr
8148 add-syms &&add-symbol-file\cr
8149 delete environment &&unset environment\cr
8150 info convenience &&show convenience\cr
8151 info copying &&show copying\cr
8152 info directories &&show directories \cr
8153 info editing &&show commands\cr
8154 info history &&show values\cr
8155 info targets &&help target\cr
8156 info values &&show values\cr
8157 info version &&show version\cr
8158 info warranty &&show warranty\cr
8159 set{\rm / }show addressprint &&set{\rm / }show print address\cr
8160 set{\rm / }show array-max &&set{\rm / }show print elements\cr
8161 set{\rm / }show arrayprint &&set{\rm / }show print array\cr
8162 set{\rm / }show asm-demangle &&set{\rm / }show print asm-demangle\cr
8163 set{\rm / }show caution &&set{\rm / }show confirm\cr
8164 set{\rm / }show demangle &&set{\rm / }show print demangle\cr
8165 set{\rm / }show history write &&set{\rm / }show history save\cr
8166 set{\rm / }show prettyprint &&set{\rm / }show print pretty\cr
8167 set{\rm / }show screen-height &&set{\rm / }show height\cr
8168 set{\rm / }show screen-width &&set{\rm / }show width\cr
8169 set{\rm / }show sevenbit-strings &&set{\rm / }show print sevenbit-strings\cr
8170 set{\rm / }show unionprint &&set{\rm / }show print union\cr
8171 set{\rm / }show vtblprint &&set{\rm / }show print vtbl\cr
8172 \cr
8173 unset &&\rm(No longer an alias for delete)\cr
8174 }
8175 @end tex
8176 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8177 @end ifset
8178
8179 @ifclear PRECONFIGURED
8180 @node Formatting Documentation
8181 @appendix Formatting Documentation
8182
8183 @cindex GDB reference card
8184 @cindex reference card
8185 The GDB 4 release includes an already-formatted reference card, ready
8186 for printing with PostScript or GhostScript, in the @file{gdb}
8187 subdirectory of the main source directory@footnote{In
8188 @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}/gdb/refcard.ps} of the version @value{GDBVN}
8189 release.}. If you can use PostScript or GhostScript with your printer,
8190 you can print the reference card immediately with @file{refcard.ps}.
8191
8192 The release also includes the source for the reference card. You
8193 can format it, using @TeX{}, by typing:
8194
8195 @example
8196 make refcard.dvi
8197 @end example
8198
8199 The GDB reference card is designed to print in landscape mode on US
8200 ``letter'' size paper; that is, on a sheet 11 inches wide by 8.5 inches
8201 high. You will need to specify this form of printing as an option to
8202 your @sc{dvi} output program.
8203
8204 @cindex documentation
8205
8206 All the documentation for GDB comes as part of the machine-readable
8207 distribution. The documentation is written in Texinfo format, which is
8208 a documentation system that uses a single source file to produce both
8209 on-line information and a printed manual. You can use one of the Info
8210 formatting commands to create the on-line version of the documentation
8211 and @TeX{} (or @code{texi2roff}) to typeset the printed version.
8212
8213 GDB includes an already formatted copy of the on-line Info version of
8214 this manual in the @file{gdb} subdirectory. The main Info file is
8215 @file{gdb-@var{version-number}/gdb/gdb.info}, and it refers to
8216 subordinate files matching @samp{gdb.info*} in the same directory. If
8217 necessary, you can print out these files, or read them with any editor;
8218 but they are easier to read using the @code{info} subsystem in GNU Emacs
8219 or the standalone @code{info} program, available as part of the GNU
8220 Texinfo distribution.
8221
8222 If you want to format these Info files yourself, you need one of the
8223 Info formatting programs, such as @code{texinfo-format-buffer} or
8224 @code{makeinfo}.
8225
8226 If you have @code{makeinfo} installed, and are in the top level GDB
8227 source directory (@file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}}, in the case of version @value{GDBVN}), you can
8228 make the Info file by typing:
8229
8230 @example
8231 cd gdb
8232 make gdb.info
8233 @end example
8234
8235 If you want to typeset and print copies of this manual, you need @TeX{},
8236 a program to print its @sc{dvi} output files, and @file{texinfo.tex}, the
8237 Texinfo definitions file.
8238
8239 @TeX{} is a typesetting program; it does not print files directly, but
8240 produces output files called @sc{dvi} files. To print a typeset
8241 document, you need a program to print @sc{dvi} files. If your system
8242 has @TeX{} installed, chances are it has such a program. The precise
8243 command to use depends on your system; @kbd{lpr -d} is common; another
8244 (for PostScript devices) is @kbd{dvips}. The @sc{dvi} print command may
8245 require a file name without any extension or a @samp{.dvi} extension.
8246
8247 @TeX{} also requires a macro definitions file called
8248 @file{texinfo.tex}. This file tells @TeX{} how to typeset a document
8249 written in Texinfo format. On its own, @TeX{} cannot read, much less
8250 typeset a Texinfo file. @file{texinfo.tex} is distributed with GDB
8251 and is located in the @file{gdb-@var{version-number}/texinfo}
8252 directory.
8253
8254 If you have @TeX{} and a @sc{dvi} printer program installed, you can
8255 typeset and print this manual. First switch to the the @file{gdb}
8256 subdirectory of the main source directory (for example, to
8257 @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}/gdb}) and then type:
8258
8259 @example
8260 make gdb.dvi
8261 @end example
8262
8263 @node Installing GDB
8264 @appendix Installing GDB
8265 @cindex configuring GDB
8266 @cindex installation
8267
8268 GDB comes with a @code{configure} script that automates the process
8269 of preparing GDB for installation; you can then use @code{make} to
8270 build the @code{gdb} program.
8271 @iftex
8272 @c irrelevant in info file; it's as current as the code it lives with.
8273 @footnote{If you have a more recent version of GDB than @value{GDBVN},
8274 look at the @file{README} file in the sources; we may have improved the
8275 installation procedures since publishing this manual.}
8276 @end iftex
8277
8278 The GDB distribution includes all the source code you need for GDB in
8279 a single directory, whose name is usually composed by appending the
8280 version number to @samp{gdb}.
8281
8282 For example, the GDB version @value{GDBVN} distribution is in the
8283 @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}} directory. That directory contains:
8284
8285 @table @code
8286 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/configure @r{(and supporting files)}
8287 script for configuring GDB and all its supporting libraries.
8288
8289 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/gdb
8290 the source specific to GDB itself
8291
8292 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/bfd
8293 source for the Binary File Descriptor library
8294
8295 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/include
8296 GNU include files
8297
8298 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/libiberty
8299 source for the @samp{-liberty} free software library
8300
8301 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/opcodes
8302 source for the library of opcode tables and disassemblers
8303
8304 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/readline
8305 source for the GNU command-line interface
8306
8307 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/glob
8308 source for the GNU filename pattern-matching subroutine
8309
8310 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/mmalloc
8311 source for the GNU memory-mapped malloc package
8312 @end table
8313
8314 The simplest way to configure and build GDB is to run @code{configure}
8315 from the @file{gdb-@var{version-number}} source directory, which in
8316 this example is the @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}} directory.
8317
8318 First switch to the @file{gdb-@var{version-number}} source directory
8319 if you are not already in it; then run @code{configure}. Pass the
8320 identifier for the platform on which GDB will run as an
8321 argument.
8322
8323 For example:
8324
8325 @example
8326 cd gdb-@value{GDBVN}
8327 ./configure @var{host}
8328 make
8329 @end example
8330
8331 @noindent
8332 where @var{host} is an identifier such as @samp{sun4} or
8333 @samp{decstation}, that identifies the platform where GDB will run.
8334 (You can often leave off @var{host}; @code{configure} tries to guess the
8335 correct value by examining your system.)
8336
8337 Running @samp{configure @var{host}} and then running @code{make} builds the
8338 @file{bfd}, @file{readline}, @file{mmalloc}, and @file{libiberty}
8339 libraries, then @code{gdb} itself. The configured source files, and the
8340 binaries, are left in the corresponding source directories.
8341
8342 @code{configure} is a Bourne-shell (@code{/bin/sh}) script; if your
8343 system does not recognize this automatically when you run a different
8344 shell, you may need to run @code{sh} on it explicitly:
8345
8346 @example
8347 sh configure @var{host}
8348 @end example
8349
8350 If you run @code{configure} from a directory that contains source
8351 directories for multiple libraries or programs, such as the
8352 @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}} source directory for version @value{GDBVN}, @code{configure}
8353 creates configuration files for every directory level underneath (unless
8354 you tell it not to, with the @samp{--norecursion} option).
8355
8356 You can run the @code{configure} script from any of the
8357 subordinate directories in the GDB distribution if you only want to
8358 configure that subdirectory, but be sure to specify a path to it.
8359
8360 For example, with version @value{GDBVN}, type the following to configure only
8361 the @code{bfd} subdirectory:
8362
8363 @example
8364 @group
8365 cd gdb-@value{GDBVN}/bfd
8366 ../configure @var{host}
8367 @end group
8368 @end example
8369
8370 You can install @code{@value{GDBP}} anywhere; it has no hardwired paths.
8371 However, you should make sure that the shell on your path (named by
8372 the @samp{SHELL} environment variable) is publicly readable. Remember
8373 that GDB uses the shell to start your program---some systems refuse to
8374 let GDB debug child processes whose programs are not readable.
8375
8376 @menu
8377 * Separate Objdir:: Compiling GDB in another directory
8378 * Config Names:: Specifying names for hosts and targets
8379 * configure Options:: Summary of options for configure
8380 @end menu
8381
8382 @node Separate Objdir
8383 @section Compiling GDB in another directory
8384
8385 If you want to run GDB versions for several host or target machines,
8386 you need a different @code{gdb} compiled for each combination of
8387 host and target. @code{configure} is designed to make this easy by
8388 allowing you to generate each configuration in a separate subdirectory,
8389 rather than in the source directory. If your @code{make} program
8390 handles the @samp{VPATH} feature (GNU @code{make} does), running
8391 @code{make} in each of these directories builds the @code{gdb}
8392 program specified there.
8393
8394 To build @code{gdb} in a separate directory, run @code{configure}
8395 with the @samp{--srcdir} option to specify where to find the source.
8396 (You also need to specify a path to find @code{configure}
8397 itself from your working directory. If the path to @code{configure}
8398 would be the same as the argument to @samp{--srcdir}, you can leave out
8399 the @samp{--srcdir} option; it will be assumed.)
8400
8401 For example, with version @value{GDBVN}, you can build GDB in a separate
8402 directory for a Sun 4 like this:
8403
8404 @example
8405 @group
8406 cd gdb-@value{GDBVN}
8407 mkdir ../gdb-sun4
8408 cd ../gdb-sun4
8409 ../gdb-@value{GDBVN}/configure sun4
8410 make
8411 @end group
8412 @end example
8413
8414 When @code{configure} builds a configuration using a remote source
8415 directory, it creates a tree for the binaries with the same structure
8416 (and using the same names) as the tree under the source directory. In
8417 the example, you'd find the Sun 4 library @file{libiberty.a} in the
8418 directory @file{gdb-sun4/libiberty}, and GDB itself in
8419 @file{gdb-sun4/gdb}.
8420
8421 One popular reason to build several GDB configurations in separate
8422 directories is to configure GDB for cross-compiling (where GDB
8423 runs on one machine---the host---while debugging programs that run on
8424 another machine---the target). You specify a cross-debugging target by
8425 giving the @samp{--target=@var{target}} option to @code{configure}.
8426
8427 When you run @code{make} to build a program or library, you must run
8428 it in a configured directory---whatever directory you were in when you
8429 called @code{configure} (or one of its subdirectories).
8430
8431 The @code{Makefile} that @code{configure} generates in each source
8432 directory also runs recursively. If you type @code{make} in a source
8433 directory such as @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}} (or in a separate configured
8434 directory configured with @samp{--srcdir=@var{path}/gdb-@value{GDBVN}}), you
8435 will build all the required libraries, and then build GDB.
8436
8437 When you have multiple hosts or targets configured in separate
8438 directories, you can run @code{make} on them in parallel (for example,
8439 if they are NFS-mounted on each of the hosts); they will not interfere
8440 with each other.
8441
8442 @node Config Names
8443 @section Specifying names for hosts and targets
8444
8445 The specifications used for hosts and targets in the @code{configure}
8446 script are based on a three-part naming scheme, but some short predefined
8447 aliases are also supported. The full naming scheme encodes three pieces
8448 of information in the following pattern:
8449
8450 @example
8451 @var{architecture}-@var{vendor}-@var{os}
8452 @end example
8453
8454 For example, you can use the alias @code{sun4} as a @var{host} argument,
8455 or as the value for @var{target} in a @code{--target=@var{target}}
8456 option. The equivalent full name is @samp{sparc-sun-sunos4}.
8457
8458 The @code{configure} script accompanying GDB does not provide
8459 any query facility to list all supported host and target names or
8460 aliases. @code{configure} calls the Bourne shell script
8461 @code{config.sub} to map abbreviations to full names; you can read the
8462 script, if you wish, or you can use it to test your guesses on
8463 abbreviations---for example:
8464
8465 @smallexample
8466 % sh config.sub sun4
8467 sparc-sun-sunos4.1.1
8468 % sh config.sub sun3
8469 m68k-sun-sunos4.1.1
8470 % sh config.sub decstation
8471 mips-dec-ultrix4.2
8472 % sh config.sub hp300bsd
8473 m68k-hp-bsd
8474 % sh config.sub i386v
8475 i386-unknown-sysv
8476 % sh config.sub i786v
8477 Invalid configuration `i786v': machine `i786v' not recognized
8478 @end smallexample
8479
8480 @noindent
8481 @code{config.sub} is also distributed in the GDB source
8482 directory (@file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}}, for version @value{GDBVN}).
8483
8484 @node configure Options
8485 @section @code{configure} options
8486
8487 Here is a summary of the @code{configure} options and arguments that
8488 are most often useful for building @value{GDBN}. @code{configure} also has
8489 several other options not listed here. @inforef{What Configure
8490 Does,,configure.info}, for a full explanation of @code{configure}.
8491 @c FIXME: Would this be more, or less, useful as an xref (ref to printed
8492 @c manual in the printed manual, ref to info file only from the info file)?
8493
8494 @example
8495 configure @r{[}--help@r{]}
8496 @r{[}--prefix=@var{dir}@r{]}
8497 @r{[}--srcdir=@var{path}@r{]}
8498 @r{[}--norecursion@r{]} @r{[}--rm@r{]}
8499 @r{[}--target=@var{target}@r{]} @var{host}
8500 @end example
8501
8502 @noindent
8503 You may introduce options with a single @samp{-} rather than
8504 @samp{--} if you prefer; but you may abbreviate option names if you use
8505 @samp{--}.
8506
8507 @table @code
8508 @item --help
8509 Display a quick summary of how to invoke @code{configure}.
8510
8511 @item -prefix=@var{dir}
8512 Configure the source to install programs and files under directory
8513 @file{@var{dir}}.
8514
8515 @item --srcdir=@var{path}
8516 @strong{Warning: using this option requires GNU @code{make}, or another
8517 @code{make} that implements the @code{VPATH} feature.}@*
8518 Use this option to make configurations in directories separate from the
8519 GDB source directories. Among other things, you can use this to
8520 build (or maintain) several configurations simultaneously, in separate
8521 directories. @code{configure} writes configuration specific files in
8522 the current directory, but arranges for them to use the source in the
8523 directory @var{path}. @code{configure} will create directories under
8524 the working directory in parallel to the source directories below
8525 @var{path}.
8526
8527 @item --norecursion
8528 Configure only the directory level where @code{configure} is executed; do not
8529 propagate configuration to subdirectories.
8530
8531 @item --rm
8532 @emph{Remove} files otherwise built during configuration.
8533
8534 @c This does not work (yet if ever). FIXME.
8535 @c @item --parse=@var{lang} @dots{}
8536 @c Configure the GDB expression parser to parse the listed languages.
8537 @c @samp{all} configures GDB for all supported languages. To get a
8538 @c list of all supported languages, omit the argument. Without this
8539 @c option, GDB is configured to parse all supported languages.
8540
8541 @item --target=@var{target}
8542 Configure GDB for cross-debugging programs running on the specified
8543 @var{target}. Without this option, GDB is configured to debug
8544 programs that run on the same machine (@var{host}) as GDB itself.
8545
8546 There is no convenient way to generate a list of all available targets.
8547
8548 @item @var{host} @dots{}
8549 Configure GDB to run on the specified @var{host}.
8550
8551 There is no convenient way to generate a list of all available hosts.
8552 @end table
8553
8554 @noindent
8555 @code{configure} accepts other options, for compatibility with
8556 configuring other GNU tools recursively; but these are the only
8557 options that affect GDB or its supporting libraries.
8558 @end ifclear
8559
8560 @node Index
8561 @unnumbered Index
8562
8563 @printindex cp
8564
8565 @tex
8566 % I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8567 % meantime:
8568 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8569 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8570 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8571 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8572 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8573 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/},}
8574 \centerline{{\bf\fontname\tenbf}, and}
8575 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8576 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8577 \page\colophon
8578 % Blame: pesch@cygnus.com, 1991.
8579 @end tex
8580
8581 @contents
8582 @bye